JP2022010496A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine suppressing decrease in game interest.SOLUTION: When a first specific result is derived (stop display of a jackpot symbol) in an identification information variable display for notifying of a prescribed determination result, a game machine executes a jackpot game, after the jackpot game, may sometimes produce a specific state (a time-shortening state) that is advantageous regarding a prescribed matter relating to a game, to a player than a normal non-specific state (a non-time-shortening state), when a second specific result different from the first specific result is derived (a stop display of a failure symbol C) in the identification information variable display, in some case producing a specific state without executing the jackpot game and in another case neither executing the jackpot game nor producing the specific state, and when the second specific result is derived in the identification information variable display, however, neither the jackpot game is produced nor the specific state is executed, may execute a second specific result-deriving/specific state non-executing performance for suggesting that, although the second specific result is derived, the specific state is not produced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot determination for determining whether or not a jackpot is performed is performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters the starting port. When the jackpot determination is made, a variable display of a special symbol for notifying the jackpot determination result is performed. When the result that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot is derived from the variable display of the special symbol, the specific gaming state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-181254

However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine, which may be in a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A game control means for executing a jackpot game when the first specific result is derived by variable display of identification information for notifying a predetermined determination result, and
It is provided with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect by using a predetermined effect means including a display means.
The game control means is used in a gaming machine in which, after the jackpot game, a predetermined state related to a game may be brought into a specific state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal non-specific state.
The game control means is a variable display of the identification information, and when a second specific result different from the first specific result is derived, the game is brought into the specific state without executing the big hit game, and the big hit game. There are times when the specific state is not reached without executing
The effect control means is
When the second specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information, but the jackpot game is not executed and the specific state is not reached, the second specific result is derived but the specific state is not reached. It is characterized in that the suggested second specific result derivation specific state non-execution effect can be executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of the display. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a game control board side. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing the general map-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing the special map-related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of the reach determination table. Special figure 1 is a configuration example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. Special figure 2 is a configuration example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is a configuration example of the first look-ahead determination table. This is a configuration example of the second look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of the game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) shows an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probabilistic variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening effect, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round effect, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol display area. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation effect of the loss without reach. It is a figure which shows an example from the start of a special figure variation effect to the reach. It is a figure which shows an example of N reach. It is a figure which shows an example of L reach. It is a figure which shows an example of L reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 23. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 25. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a movable body production. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a hold production. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a flowchart of a game control main process. It is a flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of the effect control main process. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 46. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a configuration example of the lost symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. This is a configuration example of a normal special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. (A) is a configuration example of the non-specific time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of the specific time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot game control table according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a configuration example of the game state setting table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 determination process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which represented the main game flow of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment schematically. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) shows an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure showing an example of a probabilistic background image, (E) is a figure showing an example of a time-saving background image, and (F) is a figure showing an example of a special background image. (G) is a diagram showing an example of a background image for a ceiling. (A) is a configuration example of a sub-symbol determination table associated with the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol D, and (B) is a configuration example of the sub-symbol determination table associated with the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol E. (C) is a configuration example of the sub-symbol determination table associated with the lost symbol A of the reach loss fluctuation and the lost symbol B. (A) is a configuration example of the sub-symbol determination table associated with the lost symbol A other than the reach loss variation and the lost symbol B, and (B) is the sub-symbol determination table associated with the lost symbol C of the shortened loss variation. A configuration example, (C) is a configuration example of an effect symbol determination table associated with a loss symbol C other than the shortened loss variation. This is a specific example of the effect executed in the entire time-saving effect mode related to the jackpot low probability high base game state. This is a specific example of the effect executed in the entire time-saving effect mode related to the jackpot low probability high base game state. This is a specific example of an effect to be executed when a big hit is obtained in the final special figure variation effect of the time saving effect mode related to the big hit low probability high base game state. This is a specific example of an effect that is executed when a normal loss occurs in the final special figure variation effect of the time saving effect mode related to the jackpot low probability high base game state. This is a specific example of the effect to be executed when a special loss occurs in the final special figure variation effect of the time saving effect mode related to the jackpot low probability high base game state. This is a specific example of the effect executed in the first special figure variation effect in the special effect mode. This is a specific example of an effect that is executed when a normal loss occurs in a special figure variation effect other than the last in the special effect mode. This is a specific example of the effect that is executed when the final special figure variation effect in the special effect mode causes a normal loss. This is a specific example of the effect to be executed when a special loss occurs in the special figure variation effect in the special effect mode. This is a specific example of the production performed in the normal production mode in general. This is a specific example of the production performed in the normal production mode in general. This is a specific example of the effect executed when the player reaches the ceiling and changes from the normal game state (normal effect mode) to the low-probability high-base game state (ceiling effect mode). This is a specific example of the effect executed when the variable display of the special figure of a specific number of times related to reaching the ceiling is performed in the case of SP loss fluctuation. This is a specific example of the effect executed when the special figure variable display of a specific number of times related to reaching the ceiling is a SP jackpot fluctuation. It is a specific example of the effect executed when the ceiling effect mode is changed to the normal effect mode according to the normal game state when the end condition is satisfied in the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state. The stop display of the loss symbol C is performed in the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state, and the effect is executed when the ceiling effect mode is changed to the time saving effect mode according to the special loss low probability high base game state. This is a specific example. Special loss Low probability High base game state end condition is satisfied The last special figure variable display stops and displays the loss symbol C, but it is executed when the time saving effect mode is changed to the ceiling effect mode by reaching the ceiling. This is a concrete example of the production.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is a premise of the characteristic portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the referenced figures, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplicity of description, by describing a symbol or a code that refers to an information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc. for the symbol or the code is omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. 1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the left-right / up-down direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY is the left-right / up-down direction (front view) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY. Further, "front" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY to approach the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY, and "rear" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY to approach the pachinko gaming machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including the game board 1 and a game machine frame 2 in which the game board unit YU is housed. The gaming machine frame 2 has a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game store, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 to which the gaming board unit YU is attached, and before being rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. It is provided with a door 23.

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer shape in front view. The inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23 m in which a large opening having a substantially vertically long rectangular shape is formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate and is formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY is installed in the game store, the player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY can visually recognize the gaming area 6 formed on the front surface of the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It suffices if the gaming area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY through the transparent plate 23t.

At the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, a handle 72k that can be rotated to launch a game ball is provided. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force (launch intensity) applied to the game ball to launch the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, an upper plate 34 that protrudes greatly forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly under the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion visibly protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 of the first effect button 40k is formed into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing the game ball supplied to the handle 72k is formed. Further, on the upper surface of the lower plate 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing a surplus game ball that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A is provided.

Further, on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23 m, the upper side decorative body 31, the right side decorative body 32, and the left side decorative body 33 are provided. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side are predetermined in the left-right direction facing downward. They are installed side by side at a distance. Further, at the lower part of the right decorative body 32, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion of the second effect button 41k is formed into a rod shape. Further, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the gaming.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described with reference to FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A substantially circular opening 1A is formed in the substantially center of the game board 1.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decorative body 61 is formed so as to project forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decorative body 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decorative body 61, and an outer rail between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decorative body 61. A curved inner rail 63, which is substantially parallel to the center decoration 61, is formed.

Then, on the front surface of the game board 1, the area surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, and the like forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into a game area 6 and other areas by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launch area 7 through which the launched game ball can pass toward the game area 6.

The gaming area 6 is an area in which a gaming ball launched by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine PY. A large number of gaming nails (not shown) are projected in the gaming area 6. The game nail appropriately connects the game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the large winning opening 14, and the like. It constitutes a route to guide to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, the general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first start winning device 11D is provided immediately below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. In the first start winning device 11D, the first start opening 11 is formed so that a game ball can enter. The first start winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (invariant) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

From the left side portion to the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61, a warp portion 61w through which the game ball is passed is formed. The entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side portion of the center decoration body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61 near the exit of the warp portion 61w. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guide portion 61y.

A second start winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided immediately below the first start opening 11 in the game area 6. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed mode in which the game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which the game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the electric chew opening / closing member 12k provided in the electric chew 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening / closing member 12k is composed of a substantially L-shaped member in front view, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k can project forward from the retracted state where the front end surface is flush with the game area 6. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second starting port 12 opens so that the ball can enter. Specifically, a vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k receives the game ball and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decoration body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow a game ball to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. The game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A large winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13. The large winning device 14D is formed with a large winning opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big winning opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the AT opening / closing member 14k provided in the big winning device 14D. That is, the large winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening / closing member 14k.

The AT opening / closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and normally closes the large winning opening 14. A horizontal rotation axis is provided at the lower end of the AT opening / closing member 14k. The AT opening / closing member 14k can rotate about 90 degrees around its axis of rotation so that its upper end tilts forward. When the AT opening / closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening / closing member 14k is in a state of projecting vertically to the game area 6, and the large winning opening 14 is opened so that the ball can be entered.

In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 14 only when the AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the large prize opening 14, a predetermined number (1 in the first embodiment) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the large winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and the guidance path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is the game area 6 (front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to project forward from. The game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guidance path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

It should be noted that the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 14, and the general winning opening 10 collectively enter the game ball and pass through the gate 13 of the game ball. Collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 on which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right-handed".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting left is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting right. The flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of gaming nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning openings 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a large winning opening 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the large winning opening 14 by launching the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right.

It should be noted that, at the substantially lowermost portion of the game area 6, two out ports 19 are provided to discharge the game balls that have been driven into the game area 6 but have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 6. There is. In addition, the number of prize balls for winning each winning opening can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board production unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. An image display device 50 and a board movable device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display unit 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes a movable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 that is maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state of the board movable body 55k, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically, the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a part of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 can be seen by the player and most of it cannot be seen in the standby state (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can descend from the initial position to a predetermined operating position as a whole, rise from the operating position, and return to the initial position (see FIG. 3B). The predetermined operating position is a position where the movable board 55k is located substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, a predetermined work position can be appropriately set, regardless of whether the board movable body 55k is placed above or below the substantially center of the opening 1A in front view. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in the front view around the rotation axis formed in the front-rear direction at the center thereof (see FIG. 3C). The rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the board movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, is held at the operating position, and moves from the operating position to the standby position.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

Next, the indicators 8 arranged on the right side (the portion other than the game area 6) substantially at the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 display 81a for variably displaying the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1”) and a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2”). A special figure 2 display 81b for variably displaying) and a normal figure display 82 for variably displaying a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal figure”) are included. Further, the indicators 8 include a special figure 1 hold indicator 83a for displaying the special figure 1 hold number described later and a special figure 2 hold indicator 83b for displaying the special figure 2 hold number described later. ..

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as "special figure", and special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special figure lottery". Further, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure display 81". Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure informs the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stop-displayed special figure (stop special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. If the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined special figure, a big hit game is performed with the opening of the big winning opening 14.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents a special figure corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the final result is "□□ ■■ □□ ■■" (□: lit, ■: off), which is the first, second, fifth, and sixth from the left. A certain LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. If the result of the special drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the far right, such as "■■■■■■■ □", will finally light up. This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a lost pattern.

Further, in the variable display of the special map, the variable display of the special map is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special map is stopped and displayed. The mode of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), all the LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately even if the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. Specifically, it is a case where a prize is given to the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 of the game ball during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning. This reserved special drawing lottery and variable display of special drawings are called "special drawing reservations".

The special drawing hold includes the special drawing 1 lottery held based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the "special drawing 1 holding" representing the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning of the second starting opening 12. There are a special figure 2 lottery held based on the above, and a "special figure 2 hold" representing the variable display of the special figure 2. Then, the special figure 1 hold display 83a displays the number of the special figure 1 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 1 lottery and the variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b displays the number of the special figure 2 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 2 lottery held and the variable display of the special figure 2.

It is possible to set or not set the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold. Further, when an upper limit is set for the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold, the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold may be the same or different. In the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by turning on the LEDs for the number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Figure 1 Displays the number of holds and Special Figure 2 Holds. In the following, the number of special figure 1 hold is referred to as "special figure 1 hold number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 hold is referred to as "special figure 2 hold number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 hold number" and "special figure 2 hold number" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold number". Further, the "special figure 1 hold indicator 83a" and the "special figure 2 hold indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

Further, the variable display of the fuzu is executed when the fuzu lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the normal map informs the result of the normal map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stopped-displayed normal map (stop-displayed normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal map is a predetermined specific normal map, an auxiliary game is performed with the opening of the second starting port 12.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the normal figure display 82 represents a normal figure according to the result of the normal figure lottery, that is, the result of the normal figure lottery. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs will eventually turn on, such as "□□" (□: on, ■: off). This lighting mode is a hit symbol and represents a hit. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the right will light up, such as "■ □". This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol.

Further, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variation display of the normal diagram is an embodiment in which both LEDs are turned on alternately. It should be noted that the mode of variable display in the normal drawing is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), all LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once. ..

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY, the game control board 100 that controls the game (progress of the game) capable of obtaining the game profit, and the game control board 100 responds to the control of the game. Power is supplied to the effect control board 120 that controls the effect, the image control board 140 that controls the image, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of the game ball, and the boards 100, 120, 140, 170. The power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The power is turned on / off by turning the power switch 191 on and off.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to a program is mounted on the game control board 100. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. In addition, the game that can acquire the game profit to be controlled by the game control board 100 includes a special figure lottery, a variable display of the special figure, a big hit game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, and a variable display of the normal figure. , Auxiliary games, etc. are included.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing a game control main process, a game control side timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary. A game control table and the like are stored. The gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure holding storage unit 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, if there is a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 of the game ball, the special figure hold can occur, but if the special figure hold is possible, that is, the number of special figure hold is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery or the like is acquired based on this winning. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure hold. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning a prize in the second starting port 12 of the game ball. Judgment information is referred to as "special figure 2 related judgment information". Further, the special figure 1 related judgment information and the special figure 2 related judgment information are collectively referred to as "special figure related judgment information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 hold. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 hold. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 1 hold number is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold number is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Further, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a large winning opening sensor 14a. ..

The general winning opening sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The large winning opening sensor 14a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening / closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening / closing member 14k of the prize-winning device 14D.

The type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as the game is not hindered. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as the game is not hindered.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to indicators 8 (special figure display 81, normal figure display 82, and special figure hold display 83). The display control of these indicators 8 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and also receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a launcher 72 is also connected to the payout control board 170. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73 m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensor 73a for counting.

Further, the launching device 72 is a device for launching a game ball. The handle 72k constitutes an operation unit or an input unit that receives an operation for launching a game ball to the launching device 72, and is included in the launching device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the contact of the player with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175.

Further, a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The launching device 72 drives the launching motor 72m so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the knob 72b of the firing volume. In the pachinko gaming machine PY, one gaming ball is launched about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information about the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. The effect control board 120 can grasp the progress status (game control content) of the game by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 121 that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to a program. The effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control unit that controls the effect together with the image control board 140, the voice control circuit 161 and the sub drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.) for game effect, customer waiting effect, and operation promotion. It suffices if the production can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure variation effect, hold effect, jackpot game effect, etc.), customer waiting effect, and operation of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operations during the valid period (operation valid period).

The effect control microcomputer 121 is stored in an effect ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses by the game control board 100, an effect RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and an effect ROM 123. The effect CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores a program for performing an effect control main process, a receive interrupt process, a 1 ms timer interrupt process, a 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. The effect ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 stores a start winning command holding storage unit 125 for storing a start winning command described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol designation command described later, and a special figure for storing a special figure change start command described later. A fluctuation start command storage unit 127 is provided.

Further, the image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. To do. The connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 can be both transmission of a signal from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of a signal from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. It is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores a program for image control and the like, an image RAM 143 that is used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes a program stored in the image ROM 142. .. Further, the image control board 140 is a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video) used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145. It is equipped with Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or part of these electronic components may be composed of one chip.

In the CGROM 145, for example, image data for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 50 (still image data, moving image data, specifically, a character, an item, a pattern, a figure, a character, a number, a symbol, etc.) (effect). Image data such as (including patterns) and background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and expands it in the expansion area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and the image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

The display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position where the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the voice, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. The voice control circuit 161 may be configured on a board to mount a CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as an input unit and various actuators serving as a drive source are connected to the effect control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120. Further, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

The various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k has been pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k has been pressed. When the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a detect that they have been operated, they output a signal corresponding to the detected content to the effect control board 120.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a board movable body rotation motor 55 m1 and a board movable body elevating motor 55 m2. The board movable body rotation motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The board movable body elevating motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2 via the sub drive board 162. ..

In the following, the operations of the "rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as "the operation of the board movable body 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering or raising the board movable body 55k".

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100 and the like. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and the frame lamp 53 is in accordance with the light emission pattern data. Control the light emission. The data stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

The sub drive board 162 may be configured by the board to mount the CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like and the operation control of the board movable body 55k. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. 3. Main games by the gaming machine Next, the main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to Fuzu First, we will explain the games related to Fuzu. The pachinko gaming machine PY can execute a general drawing lottery when the launched gaming ball passes through the gate 13. When the normal map lottery is performed, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map (stop display after performing variable display). Here, there are a hit symbol and a lost symbol in the normal figure that is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the lost pattern of the normal figure is also referred to as "missing normal figure" in order to distinguish it from the lost pattern of the special figure described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the lost general map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. Further, in the following, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal map or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "the establishment of the normal map variation start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of the normal map and auxiliary games based on the fact that the normal map fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the normal map related judgment information is acquired, and the normal map lottery is performed. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired general map-related determination information includes a normal symbol random number. Ordinary symbol random numbers are random numbers (judgment information) for performing collision detection. A range is appropriately provided for each random number.

3-1-1. Hit determination The hit determination is a determination for determining whether or not to hit (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using, for example, a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9A. The hit determination table can be associated with the gaming state described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table (non-time reduction hit determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a hit determination table (time reduction hit determination table) used in the time reduction state.

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (ordinary symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to the hit and the loss which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired ordinary symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and determines whether the hit or miss is a hit. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal map. The winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal map fluctuation pattern determination / normal map variable display The normal map fluctuation pattern determination is a judgment for determining a normal map fluctuation pattern using, for example, a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9B. The normal map fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined items related to the variable display of the normal map such as the normal map fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table includes the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table) and the time saving used in the non-time saving state. There is a normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table (time saving normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the state.

In each normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal map to be stopped. That is, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make the fluctuation time of the normal map different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map (lost normal map) is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is set. The variable display of the normal map when the stop display is performed is determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined so that the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds. It should be noted that these fluctuation times of the normal map can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the variable display of the normal map variation time associated with the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal map display 82. By performing the hit determination and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination in this way, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of a normal map, and is executed when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of the general map lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D opens

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko gaming machine PY controls the auxiliary game by using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, it is possible to associate a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state). The specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time in which it is difficult to make the electric chew 12D win a game ball such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time-saving state, the game ball is won a prize in the electric chew 12D, for example, longer than the first opening time such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closing) of 1.0 second. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time, which is easy to make.

In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short open auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the short time state is also called "long open auxiliary game". Further, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in the auxiliary game, and is opened a plurality of times in one auxiliary game, for example, opening once and then opening again with an interval of closing once. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games related to special figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the launched gaming ball wins the first starting port 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 81a performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (a stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 1 lottery has a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. In addition, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the prize is terminated.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched gaming ball wins the second starting port 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 81b performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (a stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 2 lottery includes a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the prize is ended.

Further, in the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 12 is "establishment of the second starting condition". That is. Further, "establishment of the first starting condition" and "establishment of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "establishment of the starting condition". In addition, the lost symbol of the special symbol is also referred to as a "missing special symbol" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned lost symbol of the normal drawing.

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of special figures and big hit games based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the special figure-related determination information is acquired, and the special figure lottery is performed. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various judgments are made on the special figure-related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol-related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a jackpot judgment. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. A range is appropriately provided for each random number. Next, each determination made using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot determination The jackpot determination is to determine whether or not a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, either a jackpot or a loss, using the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIG. 10A, for example, the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with the gaming state described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as "big hit determination table"). , "High probability jackpot judgment table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the game state, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot and the loss which are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired special symbol random numbers with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, and determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10A, the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values determined to be jackpots than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It is possible to appropriately change the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination In the jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, the jackpot symbol type (big hit symbol type) is determined using the jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10 (B). It is to be. It is possible to associate the jackpot symbol type with the jackpot content, in other words, the jackpot component (content advantageous to the player) composed of the game privilege given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the prize is awarded due to the jackpot symbol type determination (causing the jackpot symbol type determination). It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed and the jackpot used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. There is a symbol type determination table (second big hit symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, the determination value of the jackpot symbol type random number (the jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type which is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired jackpot symbol type random numbers with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 and the type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2 can be appropriately set. For example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 is used. As a jackpot symbol A, a jackpot symbol B, and a jackpot symbol C, three types of jackpot symbols are provided, and as a jackpot symbol of special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols D, a jackpot symbol E, and a jackpot symbol F are used. Can be provided. Then, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. The distribution rate for each jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination In the reach determination, for example, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, whether or not to generate reach by the special figure variation effect described later is determined by using the reach determination table as shown in FIG. 10 (C). It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time reduction reach determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a reach determination table (time reduction reach) used in the non-time reduction state. Judgment table).

In each reach judgment table, the judgment value of the reach random number (reach random number judgment value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (do not generate reach)" which are the results of reach judgment. There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired reach random numbers with the reach determination table, and determines whether or not there is reach (whether or not to generate reach).

As shown in FIG. 10C, the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "reachable (generate reach)" may be different between the non-time reduction reach determination table and the time reduction reach determination table. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "miss" is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (without reach). "Does not generate reach)" is sometimes referred to as "loss without reach". In addition, "loss without reach" may be referred to as "loss without reach", and "loss with reach" may be referred to as "loss with reach".

3-2-4. Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a fluctuation pattern judgment table of a special symbol as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12 (special figure fluctuation pattern). The determination table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special map variation pattern) of the variable display of the special map.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items related to a special figure fluctuation time, a so-called “shaku”, an effect flow (effect content) of a special figure variation effect described later, and the like. It should be noted that the special map fluctuation pattern can include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special map variation time and the effect flow (effect content) of the special map variation effect. The type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is the type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) that performs variable display to be judged, in other words, the starting port where a prize is given due to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment. It can be associated with the type (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are displayed. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used at the time of the operation.

Then, each special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table is used in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for time saving). On the other hand, similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is also used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving).

Further, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table have a jackpot use, a reach loss, and a reachless loss, respectively. Similarly, the non-time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table also have a jackpot, a reach loss, and a non-reach loss, respectively.

Further, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 hold number. For example, it is used when the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is 0 to 2 and the special drawing 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach is used, and when the special drawing 1 holding number (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss without reach. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 hold number. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach used when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 2 hold number (U2) when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach, which is used in the above.

Then, the special map display 81 performs the variation display of the special map variation time according to the special map variation pattern determined by each special map variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) of the variable display of the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the next special symbol is not immediately performed, and subsequently. , The jackpot game is executed.

Further, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with an effect flow of the special figure variation effect as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 to 12. Here, a typical effect constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as the effects that make up the effect flow of the special figure variation effect.

The normal fluctuation suggests that the effect symbols that had been stopped and displayed started to change, and each of the effect symbols constituting each effect display changed at a high speed to the extent that it was difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special figure was started. It is a production to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation effect (the part from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop of the change) related to the loss change without reach, and the part until the reach is established (determined) in the special figure change effect where the reach occurs are normal fluctuations. May consist of.

Immediately after the reach is established (determined) through normal fluctuation, the N reach is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) at the position where, for example, the effect symbols constituting the reach are temporarily stopped, and the remaining one. It is a production in which the production symbol slows down and fluctuates at a lower speed than the normal fluctuation. The jackpot expectation suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special figure variation effect ends at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol that fluctuates at the low speed stops. In the case of loss, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol different from the effect symbols constituting the reach. If the special symbol variation effect does not end in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes at high speed again, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

The L reach is a production that can be executed at the time of a big hit and a loss, and suggests whether or not the big hit game state is reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of the big hit game state. Further, the L reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the N reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to the L reach (the image dedicated to the L reach is played). In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the production content of L reach, a video of a scene different from the game related to SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character performing special training to learn a special move.

The SP reach can be executed at the time of a big hit or a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not the big hit game state is reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of the big hit game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the L reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than that in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to SP reach (the image dedicated to SP reach is played). In the SP reach, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as the production content of the SP reach, a video of a scene in which the team to which the hero character belongs and the team to which the rivals of the hero character belong play a match is displayed.

The battle effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after reaching in a short time state, and is an effect that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in the battle effect, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 50a). In the state of moving to the upper right of), it switches to the background image dedicated to the battle production (the video dedicated to the battle production is played). Further, in the battle effect, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production, the effect symbols constituting the reach in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production are displayed in the display unit 50a. Not only the state in which the image is visible in the display unit 50a, but also the state in which the effect symbol constituting the reach is difficult to see or cannot be visually recognized from the display unit 50a for a predetermined period in relation to the dedicated background image, for example. In addition, the production contents of normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effects constituting the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right of the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, it is possible to give a name to the special figure fluctuation pattern by associating the jackpot determination result and the effect content of the special figure fluctuation effect. .. The special map fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot may be collectively referred to as "big hit fluctuation", and the special map fluctuation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special map fluctuation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special map fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special map variation in N reach. The special figure fluctuation pattern at which the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach fluctuation". In addition, the loss fluctuation with reach is referred to as "loss fluctuation with reach", and the loss fluctuation without reach may be collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuation".

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform pre-reading determination using, for example, a pre-reading determination table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, based on the acquired special figure-related determination information, before performing jackpot determination. be. The look-ahead determination table is the type of start port (first start port 11 / second start port 12) related to the start prize, in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed by the start prize (special figure 1 / special figure). It is possible to relate to 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where the first start opening 11 is won and the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the second start opening 12 is won, and the special figure is drawn. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) when the variable display of 2 is performed. The look-ahead determination performed based on the first look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "first look-ahead determination", and the look-ahead determination performed based on the second look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "second look-ahead determination".

Further, the look-ahead determination table can also be associated with a gaming state (normal gaming state / high-probability high-base gaming state / low-probability high-base gaming state) described later. That is, the look-ahead judgment table includes a look-ahead judgment table (a look-ahead judgment table for a normal game state) used in a normal gaming state and a look-ahead judgment table (a high-probability high-base game) used in a high-probability high-base game state. There is a pre-reading determination table for a state) and a pre-reading determination table (a pre-reading determination table for a low-probability high-base gaming state) used in a low-probability high-based gaming state.

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead determination table used in a normal gaming state, a first look-ahead determination table used in a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a low-probability high-base gaming state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base gaming state, and the low-probability high-base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used in.

By the look-ahead determination using the look-ahead determination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by winning the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the success or failure of the jackpot is also specified as the look-ahead determination result.

Then, the look-ahead determination result including the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a look-ahead determination result along with the generation thereof. It should be noted that what kind of information is specified as the look-ahead determination result can be appropriately changed. For example, information on the jackpot symbol type can be included in the look-ahead determination result.

As described above, the special figure display 81 performs variable display of the special figure by performing the big hit determination, the big hit symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Big hit game The big hit game consists of multiple round games that involve the opening and closing of the big winning opening 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game, and the final round. It includes the ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

It is possible not to provide OP or ED. Further, in the following, the round game of a predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as a "round". For example, the first (first) round game is also referred to as "1 round (1R)", and the 10th round game is also referred to as "10 round (10R)".

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the type of jackpot symbol. And one kind or a plurality of kinds of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (big hit game components). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the big prize opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening where each opening is performed, and the time to close until the next opening. (Closed time), opening time (opening time), ending time (ending time), etc. are included.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can control the jackpot game by using, for example, the jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15 (A). That is, it is possible to set the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot game component for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15A. Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15A will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter, also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter, also referred to as “second jackpot game”), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter, also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol D (hereinafter, also referred to as “fourth jackpot game”), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter, also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter, also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth big hit game.

In each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 14 has elapsed, it is large. The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. In addition, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15A, which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a method different from this. You may do so. For example, a device capable of distributing to two winning openings is provided in the game area 6, and if one winning opening is awarded, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed, while if the other winning opening is won, a predetermined number is specified. Either a jackpot game consisting of more than a number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of less than a predetermined number of round games may be executed with a predetermined probability by a lottery or the like.

3-4. Game state Next, a game state in which the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY has a jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed and a non-big hit game state in which the jackpot game is not executed. The non-big hit game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

Regarding the jackpot probability, the advantage to the player is that the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Further, regarding the ease of opening the second starting port 12, the advantage to the player is that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the opening of the second starting port 12 per unit time is higher. It means that the time will be longer.

As the specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and the second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to mount a part of the three types of specific gaming states without mounting all of these three types of specific gaming states on the pachinko gaming machine PY.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called the "normal probability state".

Further, as a partial gaming state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than that of the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time saving state". On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is "non-time saving". It is called "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which the second starting port 12 is more likely to win a prize than the non-time saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state will be described.

For example, by setting the time-reduced state to a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be shorter than that of the non-time-reduced state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-reduced state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the normal map fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal map fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state is set in the time-shortened state. Let it be decided. As a result, the number of times the general drawing lottery is executed per unit time is larger in the time-saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the collision detection and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the general drawing lottery per unit time As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

Further, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than that in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state. .. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is released for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Try to open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time becomes the same, so once. Since the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is long, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

Further, by setting the time-reduced state to a state in which it is easier to determine that the hit is a hit than in the non-time-reduced state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-reduced state. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536, whereas in the time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536. .. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the fluctuation time of the normal figure in one auxiliary game are the same, there is a high probability that the hit determination will determine a hit. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

In this way, it is easier to win in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be long. When the three conditions are satisfied, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to easily win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, in a short time state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state. In addition, the winning probability, the fluctuation time of the normal map, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the partial gaming states focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, in other words, the first. 2 It can be said that it is an element constituting the opening ease of the starting port 12 (second starting port opening ease component).

In the time saving state, not all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may be satisfied, but only a part of the conditions may be satisfied. Finally, in the time-reduced state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-reduced state, and it is sufficient that the second starting port 12 can be easily won.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special figure variable display per unit time is small or special by making it easier to select the special figure fluctuation pattern having a shorter special figure fluctuation time than in the non-time saving state. The average of the fluctuation times may be set to be low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure hold is digested becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as a special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, the first specific game state is referred to as "high probability high base game state" and the second specific game state is referred to as "high probability low" in relation to the content of the advantage to the player for each specific game state. The "base game state" and the third specific game state are also referred to as "low probability high base game state". Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state".

Therefore, it can be said that the low-probability low-base gaming state is a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low-probability high-base gaming state is controlled by the normal probability state and time-saving state, the high-probability low-base gaming state is controlled by the high-probability state and non-time-saving state, and the high-probability high-base gaming state is controlled by the high-probability state and time-saving state. It can be said that the game is in a state of being.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low-probability low-base gaming state, a low-probability high-base gaming state, a high-probability low-base gaming state, a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the big hit game state can be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can be said to be "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. Further, the high-probability high-base gaming state and the low-probability high-base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting port 12 is higher than the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the first start opening 11 and the big prize opening 14 in which the number of prize balls by one winning is larger than the second start opening 12 are opened, so that the jackpot game state is a low probability low base game. It is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on, the normal gaming state is first set. In addition, the jackpot game state is set by displaying the stop of the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, the specific game state is set by winning the big hit and executing the big hit game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be described.

3-5. Setting of specific gaming state The pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a specific gaming state with the end of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and advanced in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. It is also possible to limit the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued.

When limiting the duration of the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be terminated when the end condition for the continuation period is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high-probability high-base gaming state, when the end condition is satisfied, the low-probability high-base gaming state or the high-probability low-base gaming state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state may be continued until the next big hit is won. Further, the same or different end conditions may be set for the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state, and when the end condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state may be set.

In addition, the end condition for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the end condition, for example, the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure can be set. In addition, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed is not limited to the elapsed time after the big hit game, the number of balls launched after the big hit game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the big hit game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the end condition to derive the result of ending in the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Further, these elements may be set individually as the end condition, or may be set in combination.

In addition, these end conditions may be set to be the same for all the specific game states that can be set after the big hit game, and may be set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You may. Further, the end condition may be different for each specific game state.

Further, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 15B, the high-probability high-base game after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol D is completed. The game may be controlled in the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a big hit is won without setting an end condition. Further, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E is completed, the game may be controlled in a low probability and high base game state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low-probability high-base game state, and the special figure variable display can be set to 100 times as the end condition. The relationship between the jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, paying attention to the game profit of the big hit, the big hit in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the big hit game is also called "high probability big hit". Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and a short time state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "probability change jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot".

4. Main effects by the gaming machine Next, the main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 32.

4-1. Production mode First, the production mode will be described. The effect mode is a division (or a higher-level conceptual attribute) of the effect. The pachinko gaming machine PY can set a customer waiting effect mode, a normal effect mode, a probability variation effect mode, a time saving effect mode, and a jackpot effect mode as the effect modes.

In the customer waiting effect mode, the special figure variable display is performed in "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". This is an effect mode that can be set when there is no special figure and indicates that the standby state is in which the variable display of the special figure is not performed.

The customer waiting effect is performed when the customer waiting effect mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16B, the setting screen G101 for making settings related to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY. Is displayed.

The settings related to the effect include a volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 52, a brightness setting of the display unit 50a, a frequency setting of the effect to be executed, and the like. It should be noted that the setting items related to the effect can be appropriately set. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demo video G100.

The normal effect mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the game is in the normal game state. Further, a plurality of lower production modes belonging to the normal production mode can be provided. For example, as the lower-level effect mode belonging to the normal effect mode, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided.

In the following, the production mode of the lower hierarchy belonging to the production mode is also referred to as a “production stage”. Along with this, the first normal production mode is also referred to as the "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also referred to as the "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also referred to as the "third normal production stage". say. Unless there are special circumstances, basically, the effect mode set when the special figure fluctuation display is first started after the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on is the first normal effect stage ( It is assumed that it is the first normal effect mode). However, the type of the effect mode initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this way, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Further, as the switching condition, it is possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on the SP reach loss variation is executed.

Further, the normal effect mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal effect mode may be set to the effect mode indicating that the non-time saving state is set. Alternatively, a predetermined effect mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Further, in the low-probability low-base gaming state and the high-probability low-base gaming state generated under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation effect mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the state is a high probability high base game state.

The time saving effect mode can be set in the "low probability high base game state" or the "high probability high base game state", and is either the low probability high base game state or the high probability high base game state, and at least the time reduction. This is an effect mode indicating that the state is in a state. The time-saving effect mode is set only in the low-probability high-base game state, and can be set to the effect mode indicating that the time-saving effect mode is the low-probability high-base game state.

As with the normal effect mode, a plurality of effect stages for the effect mode are provided for either or either of the probabilistic effect mode and the time-saving effect mode, and the effect stage is switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. You can do it.

Further, in various effect modes in which the special figure variation effect (special figure variable display) described later can be executed, a background image is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and various effects are executed superimposed on the background image. .. Then, the background image displayed on the display unit 50a can be associated with the effect mode. In the following, the background image associated with this effect mode is positioned as the "basic background image" in the effect mode.

Then, for example, as a basic background image associated with the first normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 17 (A): first normal background image G111) showing the scenery of the city is displayed, and the second normal As a basic background image associated with the production stage, a background image (FIG. 17 (B): second normal background image G112) representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed and associated with the third normal production stage. As a basic background image, a background image (FIG. 17 (C): third normal background image G113) showing the inside of the restaurant is displayed.

Further, for example, a background image representing the universe (background image for probabilistic variation G120) is displayed as a basic background image associated with the probabilistic effect mode, and as a basic background image associated with the time saving effect mode, the background image is displayed. A background image (time saving background image G130) representing the sky is displayed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in the special figure variation effect, but the special figure variation effect is established for the entire section of the special figure variation effect when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before reaching and a rear part after reaching when reach occurs.

Then, in each effect mode, the basic background image related to the effect mode is displayed in the entire section when the reach of the special figure variation effect does not occur and in the front stage portion when the reach occurs. Further, in the latter part when the reach of the special figure variation effect occurs, a background image different from the basic background image such as a dedicated background image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed.

Further, as in the background image, a basic BGM is set in each effect mode. Therefore, as the basic BGM, the BGM associated with the first normal effect stage (first normal BGM), the BGM associated with the second normal effect stage (second normal BGM), and the third normal effect A BGM associated with the stage (third normal BGM), a BGM associated with the probability variation effect mode (probability variation BGM), and a BGM associated with the time reduction effect mode (time reduction BGM) are set.

Then, as in the background image, in each effect mode, the basic BGM related to the effect mode is the speaker 52 in the entire section when the reach of the special figure variation effect does not occur and in the front stage portion when the reach occurs. Is output from. Further, in the latter part when the reach of the special figure variation effect occurs, a BGM different from the basic BGM such as a dedicated BGM corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speaker 52.

Further, the jackpot effect mode is an effect mode that can be set when the jackpot game is being performed in the "big hit game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot effect mode, for example, during the opening in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18A, the opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and the right-handed image G2 prompting "right-handed" are displayed on the display unit 50a. Is displayed. The jackpot opening effect is performed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2 on the display unit 50a. ..

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18B, the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display unit 50a, and the round image showing the number of rounds is displayed. A round effect is performed in which the prize ball number image G4 suggesting the G3 and the number of prize balls paid out is displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the background of the right-handed image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4 on the display unit 50a, and the background image according to the type of the jackpot game (background for the round). The image G201) is displayed, and the BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Further, during the ending in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18C, the display unit 50a suggests the ending image G5 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls paid out. The jackpot ending effect in which the total prize ball number image G6 is displayed is performed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6. Will be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as a "big hit game effect" as an effect performed in the jackpot game. That is, the jackpot game effect is performed in the jackpot effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko gaming machine PY is based on the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure, the special figure lottery result (big hit judgment result, big hit symbol type judgment result), and the like. , Perform a special figure fluctuation effect.

In the special figure variation effect, the display unit 50a superimposes the variation display of the effect symbol on the predetermined background image. In the variable display of the effect symbol, it stops after the effect symbol changes. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variation display of the effect symbol are performed, the variation is stopped and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect symbol.

In the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Further, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, various effect devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a panel movable device 55, a first effect button device 40, and a second effect button device 41 are used. It is possible to perform a figure variation effect.

Next, in the special figure variation effect executed in response to the special figure variable display, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described. The effect symbol is also identification information for showing the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types are provided. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the effect symbol constitutes identification information for showing the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect symbols are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, the effect symbols may be composed of Arabic numerals 1 to 9 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “numbers”), and nine effect symbols may be provided. In this case, the numbers that are the constituent elements of the effect symbol constitute the identification information. Then, the effect symbol including the number "1" is referred to as the effect symbol G10a. Similarly, the effect symbols including the numbers "2" to the numbers "9" are referred to as the effect symbols G10b to the effect symbols G10e. In addition, when handling individual production symbols without distinction from the viewpoint of an image, they are collectively referred to as "effect design G10".

In addition, the numerical parts of the effect symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The number portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, as a component of the effect symbol G10, a color is included in addition to the numbers. The configuration of the effect symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be appropriately changed. For example, other components such as a character associated with each number may be added to the effect symbol G10.

Subsequently, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 19B, the left side, the center, and the right side of the display unit 50a divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction are the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol. The region can be 50b3. The effect symbol G10 is displayed in any of the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3.

Then, mainly, in the front stage portion of the special symbol variation effect, the effect symbol G10 displayed in the left effect symbol area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left effect symbol EZ1", and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the middle effect symbol area 50b2 is referred to. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3, the effect symbol G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the effect symbols are displayed at relative display positions. When distinguishing G10, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3. When the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are handled without distinction from the viewpoint of the display area and display position of the effect symbol, they are collectively referred to as "effect symbol EZ".

Further, as will be described later, in the special symbol variation effect, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variablely displayed, but finally, the effect symbol is shown in the form of showing the special symbol lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit symbol type). The stop display of EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Then, when the jackpot is notified as a result of the special figure lottery, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three effect symbols G10 having the same number are arranged side by side (so-called "doublet"). Therefore, in the following, the effect symbol G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when the jackpot is notified is referred to as a "big hit effect symbol". For example, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed as "7, 7, 7", the jackpot effect symbol is "effect symbol G10 g", and when the effect symbols are stopped and displayed as "9, 9, 9", the jackpot effect symbol is "7, 7, 9". Directed design G10i ". Further, the jackpot effect symbol may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect symbol. For example, if the jackpot effect symbol is "effect symbol G10g", the jackpot effect symbol is "7", and if the jackpot effect symbol is "effect symbol G10i", the jackpot effect symbol is "9". Further, as will be described later, in the special figure variation effect, the special figure lottery result is completely shown when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are deterministically stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special symbol variation effect, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are tentatively stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) before the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are deterministically stopped and displayed. This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, after the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode showing a certain (relatively disadvantageous to the player) jackpot, the mode is changed to a mode showing another (relatively advantageous to the player) jackpot. May be done. Therefore, the effect symbol G10 consisting of the same numbers constituting the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (before being changed) in such a manner that the jackpot is first indicated. Is also referred to as a "big hit production design".

Further, in the special symbol variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the effect symbols G10 having the same number. Reach may be performed to temporarily display the stop display (temporary stop display). As will be described later, the reach is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and as a result of the reach, the three effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. This means that you have a better chance of hitting the jackpot. Therefore, the effect symbol G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 related to the reach is referred to as a "reach effect symbol". For example, when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effect symbol G10a of "1", the reach effect symbol is "effect symbol G10a" and temporarily stopped and displayed on the effect symbol G10a of "3". , The reach production symbol is "production symbol G10c". Further, the reach effect symbol may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect symbol. For example, if the reach effect symbol is "effect symbol G10a", the reach effect symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the reach effect symbol is "effect symbol G10c", the reach effect symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, it is possible to provide a small symbol area 50c for variably displaying a small symbol in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, the small symbol can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, but for example, the effect symbol G10 related to the effect symbol EZ can be reduced and configured as it is. For example, in the small symbol area 50c, it is possible to display three effect symbols G10 as in the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In this case, the small symbol area 50c is divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction, and the small symbol displayed on the left side is referred to as "left small symbol KZ1", and the small symbol displayed in the center is referred to as "small and medium-sized symbol KZ2". The small symbol displayed on the right side can be referred to as "right small symbol KZ3". Then, as in the case of the effect symbol EZ, when the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 are handled without distinction from the viewpoint of the display area and the display position, they are collectively referred to as "small symbol KZ". Further, with respect to the special symbol, the effect symbol EZ and the small symbol KZ may be collectively referred to as "sub symbol SZ".

Further, when the small symbol area 50c is formed in the display unit 50a, the display area / display position can be appropriately set. Further, the display area / display position of the small symbol area 50c may be changed in the middle depending on the situation of the effect.

In FIG. 19B, the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c are clearly indicated by a alternate long and short dash line, but this is the left effect symbol area 50b1. It is described to represent the range of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

Further, as described above, as the effects constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect, there are normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect. Here, some of these will be described.

4-2-1. Normal fluctuation The pachinko gaming machine PY can first perform normal fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation production. The normal fluctuation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, the normal fluctuation will be specifically described. As the small symbols, the left small symbol EZ1, the medium effect symbol EZ2, and the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the right effect symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the variable display of the special figure is waiting, FIG. 20 (B). As shown in, the special figure fluctuation effect is started with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

It is possible to make the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display unit 50a, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. It may be replaced one after another at a fixed position. The display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be the same as the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3.

Further, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side such as background images G111 to G115. Is displayed with transparency that is easy to see. Further, depending on the situation, one of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be visually displayed and the other may be hidden.

Then, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss without reach (for example, the normal loss fluctuation), the variable display of the special figure ends without the reach occurring (special figure). (Stop display), the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches (so-called “barracuda stitches”) peculiar to the loss without reach.

Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 20 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then the figure. As shown in FIG. 20 (D), the right effect symbol EZ3 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. 20 (E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 is omitted in the vertical direction. Temporarily stop (temporarily stop) at the center position.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 20 (F), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in a state of being lined up in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction are completely all at once. The stop is confirmed (the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) are completely stopped at the random stitches, that is, when the definite stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is stopped all at once with the same pattern as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed.

Note that the temporary stop of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 means that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move significantly in the place as in the scroll display, but slightly shake or reciprocate on the spot. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed. A definite stop display may be broadly referred to as a "stop display". Further, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the effect symbols are stopped in the order of left effect symbol EZ1 → right effect symbol EZ3 → middle effect symbol EZ2, but the order of stop ( The method) is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, the establishment of reach will be explained. Even when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, the N loss fluctuation), basically, in the same manner as in the case of no reach described above, the display unit 50a As shown in FIG. 21 (A), the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are deterministically stopped and displayed and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 21B, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 21 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 according to the number "5" is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then the figure is shown. As shown in 21 (D), the right effect symbols EZ3 having the same number "5" are arranged horizontally at substantially the center position in the vertical direction and temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) to establish reach. When the reach is established, an image (reach establishment suggestion image) G11 indicating that the reach is established is displayed. Even if the reach is established in the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is continuously performed.

Further, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of the temporary stop is this. It is not limited to, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the number of the effect symbol constituting the reach is not limited to "5". Further, the position of temporary stop (temporary stop) is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols constituting the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special map variation effect in the case of loss without reach and the section from the start of the special map variation effect when reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be set as normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various notice effects such as so-called "pseudo-ren", cut-in notice, and dialogue notice until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is possible to enter the so-called "zone" until the reach is established.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko gaming machine PY can perform N-reach when the reach is established after the normal fluctuation. The N reach is a production that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a production for making the player expect a big hit. Next, N reach will be specifically described.

When the reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (D), N reach is performed from that point. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the medium effect symbol EZ2, which is displaying (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually decelerates.

If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of loss with reach (for example, N loss fluctuation), the middle effect symbol EZ2 is provisionally placed at the substantially center position in the vertical direction from the state where the reach is established. The stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed by stopping (temporarily stopping). At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol composed of a number different from the numbers constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 22 (C-1)). EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. 22 (D), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, and the loss is peculiar to the loss with reach. The left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

Further, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) completely stop at the loss pattern peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, 3 The two small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped all at once with the same loss as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which is peculiar to the loss with reach, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. The contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure variation effect does not end in N reach, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium effect symbol EZ2 that has not stopped fluctuates again at high speed, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. The L-reach pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L-reach after N-reach. The L reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is higher than that of the N reach, and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit. Although the established reach is maintained even in the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), at the start of the L reach, the effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 constituting the reach are reduced and displayed. It moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a) in the portion 50a so as not to overlap the small symbol area 50c.

Further, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, a background image dedicated to L reach (background image G114 for L reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image G114 for L reach is composed of a moving image developed by a predetermined Thule. The content of the story of the moving image related to the background image G114 for L reach can be appropriately set, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to the girl.

When the background image G114 for L reach is displayed, it starts from a scene where the main character is waiting for a girl at a meeting place as shown in FIG. 23 (A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at the substantially center of the display unit 50a, as the middle effect symbol EZ2, the effect symbol of the number "5" constituting the reach and the effect symbol of the number "4" not constituting the reach appear. Then, it slowly rotates so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the effect symbol of the number "4" and the effect symbol of the number "5" are continuously rotated, the Thule related to the background image G114 for L reach progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), the hero character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the substantially center of the display unit 50a, the effect symbol of the number "5" constituting the reach and the effect symbol of the number "4" not constituting the reach will mutually repel the opponent. Collide with each other. Since the production symbol of the number "5" constitutes the reach and the production design of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the production design of the number "4" is skipped and the production design of the number "5" is If it remains, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the jackpot is established, while the effect symbol of the number "5" is skipped and the effect symbol of the number "4" remains, the effect of the aspect showing the reach loss. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 23 (C) is the final phase of the L reach, and the effect suggesting a big hit (big hit suggestion effect) is executed or the effect suggesting a loss (loss suggestion effect) is executed. It constitutes a branch point that branches into a crab (so-called "winning branch point").

When the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the jackpot fluctuation (L jackpot fluctuation) at the hit branch point, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1), a smiling girl is up on the display unit 50a. After being displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character who is happy to succeed in confession is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the number "5" constituting the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display unit 50a. Displayed in mode. That is, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit. In addition, the display of the main character who is happy to succeed in confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion effect. After the jackpot suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the loss variation with reach (L loss variation) after the hit branch point, the figure is shown in the background image G114 for L reach without performing the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), after a girl with a sad expression is displayed up on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the number "5" not constituting the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display unit 50a. It is displayed in. That is, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss. In addition, the display of the hero character who fails to confess and is discouraged constitutes a loss suggestion effect. After the loss suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches for reach.

4-2-5. SP reach Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is higher than that of the L reach, and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit. Although the established reach is maintained even in the SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), at the start of the SP reach, the effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 constituting the reach are reduced and displayed. It moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a) in the portion 50a so as not to overlap the small symbol area 50c.

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image G115 for SP reach is composed of a moving image developed by a predetermined Thule. The content of the story of the video related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and the enemy character, which is a rival of the main character, confront each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter, who face each other in a baseball game as a pitcher and a batter.

When the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25 (A), and then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), in the center of the display unit 50a. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that the SP reach has been started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "" Beat the enemy batter XX !! "in FIG. 25 (B)" and an effect image G11b that enhances the title image G11a. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the background image G115 for SP reach, the main character throws the ball as shown in FIG. 26 (A), and the ball advances toward the enemy character as shown in FIG. 26 (B). As shown in C), the enemy character begins to swing the bat. Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is about to be settled. This scene constitutes a turning point (winning turning point) where the main character wins in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter and a big hit is suggested or a defeat is suggested and a loss is suggested.

After this hit branch point, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is a jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 27 (A-1), the enemy character makes a missed swing on the display unit 50a. After winning the confrontation, as shown in Fig. 27 (B-1), the main character who strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. Will be done. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character who has won the confrontation and is screaming, and the output of a predetermined sound effect make up the jackpot suggestion effect. After the jackpot suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the reach loss variation (SP loss variation) after the hit branch point, the SP reach background image G115 shows FIG. 27 (SP reach loss variation) without the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in Fig. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the hero character who is defeated in the confrontation and is disappointed constitutes a loss suggestion production. After the loss suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches for reach.

Next, the movable body effect and the operation effect performed in the special figure variation effect will be described. Movable body effects and operation effects are independent of these effects when they are performed as part of these effects in the form of being incorporated into the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, and N reach, as well as jackpot game effects. May be done. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform a movable body effect accompanied by an operation of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body effect is an effect using a movable device such as a board movable device 55, and functions as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit and the development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body effect functions as an effect suggesting the development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first of all, FIG. 28. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 operates, the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and is held at that position for a predetermined time. Further, at this time, the effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. It should be noted that the operation content of the movable device in the movable body effect can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY has an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result effect is an effect that is performed according to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion effect. Functions as a production.

For example, as described above, when the winning branch point is reached in the L reach or SP reach, a period during which the operation of pressing the first effect button 40k is valid (operation valid period) occurs, and the operation valid period occurs. , As shown in FIG. 29 (A), an effect (operation promotion effect) for urging the operation of the first effect button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion effect, the first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k, which is an operation target, and an image (that is, pressing operation) representing an operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the first effect button 40k. The operation image) G12b and an image (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c showing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k are included.

The operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining operation valid period time. Note that FIG. 29B shows a state in which the operation valid period has occurred and one-third of the operation valid time has elapsed.

If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), the first effect button is pressed after the first effect button 40k is pressed during the operation valid period, or during the operation valid period. After the remaining time of the operation valid period is exhausted without operating 40k, the operation result effect is performed.

As an operation result effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), the board movable device 55 is operated, the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is produced. Rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result effect includes the movable body effect. Further, at this time, as an operation result effect, the effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k is raised, so that the operation result production is completed. When the operation result production is completed, a jackpot suggestion production is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is reach loss fluctuation (SP loss fluctuation), even if the first effect button 40k is pressed during the operation valid period, or the first effect button 40k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the effect button operation valid period is exhausted without being performed, the operation result effect is not performed and the loss suggestion effect is performed.

The operation result effect is not limited to the operation of the board movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be appropriately changed or added. In addition, the operation effect is not limited to the special figure variation effect, but can also be executed in the big hit effect.

4-5. Look-ahead effect Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed before the variable display of the special figure, which is the target of the special figure hold, is executed will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the jackpot determination has not been made, based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation effect. .. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, and functions as an effect that makes the big hit expected even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a hold change notice using a hold effect indicating a special figure hold. Here, the hold effect and the hold change notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the hold effect is performed in the hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display unit 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the left-right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are provided side by side in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first region 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is the first to occur in the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 1 variable display is the first based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second region 50d2 to the fourth region 50d4, it occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 hold, and is based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed in the 2nd to 4th positions.

In the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1". Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in hold order 2" and "hold order 3". It is referred to as "special figure 1 hold" and "special figure 1 hold in hold order 4". That is, the existing special figure 1 hold is referred to as "hold order 1" to "hold order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the variable display area 50e is formed on the left side of the hold display area 50d. In the variation display area 50e, the icon representing the currently executed special figure 1 variation display is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. However, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are collectively referred to as "hold effect". .. In addition, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Further, the running special figure 1 variation display indicated by the icon is also referred to as “the variation”.

In FIG. 30A, the reserved display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are indicated by a one-dot chain line, and the first region 50d1 to the fourth region 50d4 are indicated by a broken line, which are indicated by the reserved display area 50d. It is described to represent the range of the first region 50d1 to the fourth region 50d4 and the variable display region 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be described. In the following description, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 change is being displayed (the special figure change is being produced), and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), in the above-mentioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (holding order) that occurred first among the special figure 1 hold currently held. The hold icon HA2 representing the special figure 1 hold of 1 is displayed, and in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (hold order 2) that occurs after the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA2 is displayed. The hold icon HA3 indicating the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned variation display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executing special figure 1 variation display is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30B is a normal mode.

As described above, in the hold effect, the hold display area 50d is displayed side by side from the left end to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 hold occurs. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbol, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special symbol-related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed by the hold icon. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30C, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) is not shown. Move to the first region 50d1 in the figure. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are shifted to the left by one each. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3 is the earliest occurrence of the special figure 1 hold currently held. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation according to the change of the special figure variable display to be started next.

Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the variation display area 50e represents the execution special figure 1 variation display, it becomes the icon HA2 when it is displayed in the variation display area 50e. That is, as a word attached before the "icon", the icon displayed in the hold display area 50d is referred to as "hold", and the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is referred to as "corresponding". In other words, when the hold icon is displayed and the start condition for the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied for the special symbol hold indicated by the hold icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when the icon is changed from the hold icon to the icon, in other words, when the icon is moved from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30C, the icon is magnified about twice when moving from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 from this situation and the special figure 1 hold occurs, as shown in FIG. 30 (E), a new hold occurs in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. The icon HA4 is displayed in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting port 11 and a random number related to the special figure 1 is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon disappears when the special figure 1 variable display based on the prize is completed, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (pending state and running state). Depending on the situation, it will exist under different names (hold icon and the icon).

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the winning / failing information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the pass / fail information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called "hold notice".

When the display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, that is, when the hold notice is given, the player can expect that the jackpot may be won by the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Next, a specific example of the hold notice will be described. As a specific example of the hold notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30 (E) is a special mode.

As one type of hold notice, it becomes a special mode immediately after the hold icon is displayed, in other words, the hold notice is given when the special figure 1 hold occurs (when the first starting port 11 is won). There is a type. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30 (D)), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned event occurs, the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown) in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold, as in the case of FIG. 30 (E). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode seems to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is made completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the display position does not move. It may be configured to shake lightly in the field.

Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31 (B)) (hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after the display, but it may be displayed in the special mode and the period displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of hold notice, there is a hold notice type that becomes a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, the hold icon change notice is given at the time of the shift of the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30 (D)), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned second region 50d2 (not shown) is generated, as shown in FIG. Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. 32 (D). The hold icon HA3 is moved to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 is moved to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32 (D)) (hold notice is given). ..

In addition, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the hold notice so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is a normal embodiment, and green, red, and gold are special embodiments. Then, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set so as to increase in the order of white <green <red <gold.

The look-ahead effect can be performed on both or one of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Further, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, for example, an image other than the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a such as a background image, a sound output from the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, and a movable board. It is possible to execute the operation by using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as an effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues uninterrupted from the execution such as the hold icon change notice by the hold icon HA until the special figure change display is started, the effect symbol is stopped. It may be an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time the display is performed or every time the variable display of the effect symbol is started.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 42. The flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, a counter, a timer, a flag, a status, a buffer, and the like appearing in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 101 provided on the gaming control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the gaming ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, the power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on processing, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, SIO (System Input / Output), PIO (Parallel Input / Output), CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit: interrupt time management) Circuit) is set.

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are disabled (S002), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal symbol-related determination information and the special symbol-related determination information are added by 1 and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of the counter of each random number may be a value other than "0" or may be changed at random. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the game CPU 102, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is used. The process of updating the counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004). ..

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), in each process described below, commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and plays the game as the lower plate full data. Stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the counter value update processing of various random numbers related to the normal figure-related judgment information and the special figure-related judgment information includes the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt processing (main side timer interrupt processing). After the end of S005), it is performed both in the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Other processes (S107) include power failure monitoring processing when the power is turned off, updating the timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as another process (S107), a payout control process for paying out the prize ball to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12, the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", the prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processes of the game control main processes S002 to S004 until the interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec). ), The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. The game control microcomputer 101 is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process (S005) in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again. Outputs the command etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If no game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if a game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered. General prize-winning prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“3” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10 is added to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status described later is 1, in other words, whether or not the variable display of the normal figure or the auxiliary game is performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207, and if the normal operation status = 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F). The normal symbol random number indicated by the above is acquired as the normal diagram-related determination information (S205), and the acquired normal symbol-related determination information is stored in the normal diagram holding storage unit 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206). Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball is designated. The second starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“2” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12.

Next, when the special figure 2 hold number (specifically, the numerical value of the counter (special figure 2 hold number counter) for counting the special figure 2 hold number provided in the gaming RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the number of special figure 2 hold is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the number of special figure 2 hold is not "4" or more (less than "4"), the process proceeds to step S214. NO in S209), special figure 2 holding number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 hold number addition process, the special figure 2 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-). The special figure 2 related determination information composed of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, the second look-ahead determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start-up winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball is designated. The first starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 hold (specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of special figure 1 hold provided in the gaming RAM 104 (special figure 1 hold number counter)) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not it is (S216). If the number of special figure 1 hold is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of special figure 1 hold is not (less than) "4" or more (NO in S216). ), The special figure 1 hold number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 hold number addition process, the special figure 1 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-). The special figure 1 related determination information composed of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, the first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first start winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the storage area of the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a according to the current number of special figure 1 hold (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a. If the game ball has not won in the large winning opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if the game ball has won in the large winning opening 14 (YES in S221), the gaming RAM 104 is entered. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the big winning opening 14 in one round game of the big hit game. In addition, the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game is completed. In the first embodiment, the winning rule number is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

When the counter value of the big prize opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more, that is, less than "11". If (NO in S222), the counter value of the large prize opening prize counter is added by "1" (S223), and the large winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), End the sensor detection process. In the large prize opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“9” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the large winning opening 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14.

As a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, a sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided, and based on the sensor detecting the game ball, processing other than the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 is performed. Is also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, the normal operation processing related to the control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing related to the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The "normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the normal map and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 86. Further, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, and the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal map fluctuation display of the normal map fluctuation time according to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal map display 82. And change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation start command according to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map variation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is variablely displayed. In the normal symbol variation processing (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal map fluctuation time has elapsed since the execution of the normal map variation display started (whether or not the normal map variation display is terminated), and the normal symbol variation processing is performed. If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop display of the normal figure is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map fluctuation display.

The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the running normal figure started (whether to end the stop display of the normal figure). Whether or not) is determined, and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal figure displayed as stopped is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped symbol is a lost symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game is completed, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, the special operation processing relating to the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing related to the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and changes the special symbol when the "special operation status" is "2". The process (S1503) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4", the jackpot game control is performed. The process (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the special symbol and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is variablely displayed. The special symbol variation processing will be described in detail later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game control process to perform a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table. When the jackpot game ends, the special action status is changed to "5". When each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are completed and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. It should be noted that the state in which the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and controls the big hit game is the "big hit game state", and the special operation status "4" is set as the "big hit". It is called "game state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting a game state to be controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a big hit game, the high probability flag is turned ON in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Further, at this time, when limiting the duration of the high probability state, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. .. Further, when controlling in the time saving state after the big hit game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Further, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

Further, in the game state setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating the game state after the big hit game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (S1601). When the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12, the special figure 2 1 It is determined whether or not the number of reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 11. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer wait flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol wait process is completed, and if the customer wait flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer wait command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , The customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is completed.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" but the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start. When there is one or more stores of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the mouth 11, the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, the earliest stored one is read out and based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state. Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (big hit judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (big hit symbol type determination). Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the loss symbol data representing the loss is set in the special symbol buffer, and the symbol designation command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the state is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is in the non-time saving state (YES in S1651), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is selected (S1652), and then the process proceeds to step S1654. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is “big hit”. If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), it is for the big hit symbol from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the variation pattern determination table in Special Figure 1 (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 makes a reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is collated with the reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) to determine whether or not there is reach.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is “with reach” (S1656). If there is reach (YES in S1656), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach is selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). Then, the process proceeds to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of special figure 1 holdes is confirmed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 is used. Select (S1657) the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach according to the number of reserved special figures 1 and then proceed to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number, collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1569, and then collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table. Special Figure 1 Judgment of fluctuation pattern Special Figure 1 Judgment of fluctuation pattern is performed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and the special figure fluctuation according to the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

The special operation timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the set special figure 1 fluctuation start command includes information on the type of special symbol (that is, special figure 1) and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610). Information on the result (information on the special map fluctuation pattern including information on the presence or absence of reach and the special map fluctuation time) is included.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 display 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). ..

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a. The storage area corresponding to the first hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 1 hold storage unit shift process (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 hold number counter (S1613), and reduces and changes the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold display 83a by "1" (S1613). S1614), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns off the customer waiting flag (S1617), and performs a special symbol standby process. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is completed without executing step S1617.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12 is stored. If there is, the special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) are basically the same as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610). ..

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically performed except that the table used for the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table and the table used for the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since the process is the same as that of the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) is also basically a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) except that the table used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. Since the process is the same as S1610), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start the change display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure change time corresponding to the special figure change pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b. A special figure 2 hold storage unit shift process for clearing the storage area corresponding to the fourth hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is performed (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 hold number counter (S1606), and reduces and changes the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold display 83b by "1" (S1607). ), The special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1616.

As described above, in the basic embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold. Further, in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is easier to win the jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold. It should be noted that the digestion of the special figure 1 hold may be executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold. Further, the digestion of the special figure 1 hold and the digestion of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs regardless of the type of the special figure.

[Special symbol change processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1701). When the variation display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1701), when the variation processing of the special symbol is terminated and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated (YES in S1701), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 81. Is terminated, and the stop display of the special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or lost special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the special symbol ends is output as an output buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol change processing is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). When the stop display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1751), when the stop display of the special symbol is terminated by ending the special symbol confirmation process (YES in S1751), the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) is currently present. It is determined whether or not it is (S1752). In the following, the time when the special symbol confirmation time elapses after the stop display of the special symbol is started may be referred to as "the stop display special symbol is confirmed".

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), the time reduction state (time reduction flag is ON). Whether or not it is determined (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time saving state (YES in S1753), the rest of the variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state. The value of the time saving remaining number counter for measuring the number of times (time saving remaining number) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time reduction remaining number counter (number of time reduction remaining) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time reduction remaining number) is "0" (in S1755). YES), the state is changed from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned off) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. Is determined (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special operation status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special symbol confirmation process is completed, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the game state is reset (YES). The normal game state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to “4” (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in the predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) according to the type of the jackpot symbol. (Time from being done to starting one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

6. Production control by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 43 to 47. The flowchart for controlling the effect described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, the counter, timer, flag, buffer and the like appearing in the following description of the effect control by the effect control board 120 are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads out the program of the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 43 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main process, first, the power-on process is performed according to the power-on (S4001). In the power-on processing, for example, the effect CPU 122 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set.

Next, the interrupt is disabled (S4002) and the random number seed update process is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations related to various effects are updated. The random numbers for effect determination include various random numbers for determining the effect content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special figure variation effect pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for determination for various effects can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Instead of adding the random values by 1 at the time of updating, it may be added by 2 or the like. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 (for example, a special figure variation effect start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening effect start command, and a round effect start, which will be described later). A command, an ending effect start command, etc.) are transmitted to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a according to the received command (executes various effects by the image). Further, the effect control board 120 can output sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (execute various effects by sound), and the sub drive board, together with various effects performed by the image control board 140. The frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via 162 (various effects are executed by the light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (various effects are executed by the operation). The various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, round effect, big hit ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, and the like.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently enables interrupts (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4010), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 are input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124. This receive interrupt process is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a 1 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs an input process (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates the second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 emits light emission data created by the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the effect of the image. Is output to the sub drive board 162. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the board movable body 55k) in order to drive the board movable body 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the effect RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control the time related to various predetermined effects. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1 ms timer interrupt process.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a receive command analysis process for analyzing a command or the like stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the basic embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the voice control process, the creation of voice data (data for controlling the output of voice from the speaker 52) and the voice control circuit 161 are performed based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124. Is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the effect content or the like indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 47. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second starting winning command) from the game control board 100, in other words, receiving the starting winning command. It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4302, while if the start winning command has not been received (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a start winning process according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. In the start winning process, the received start winning command is stored in the start winning command hold storage unit 125 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree. The look-ahead effect includes a hold notice that displays the hold icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the special symbol, and the like. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 is voice-controlled according to the pre-reading effect content indicated by the pre-reading effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the pre-reading effect is performed by the image performed by the image control board 140. A voice is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (a look-ahead effect by voice is executed), and a frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via a sub drive board 162 (a look-ahead effect by light emission is executed). It is possible to operate 55k (execute the look-ahead effect by the operation).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol specification command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the symbol specification command (YES in S4303), the effect control command is issued to the effect RAM 124. It is stored in the symbol designation command storage unit 126 in (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure change start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307, while if the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production content of the special figure change effect is determined. , The special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect is performed.

In the special figure variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first stores the special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage unit 127 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed based on the content of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, lost special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command. -EZ3 and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol for determining the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are selected. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination) is set for a plurality of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Value) is distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random numbers with the selected stop symbol pattern table, and determines the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, the data representing the determined effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation without reach, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to have a so-called “separate stitch”. Further, if the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation with reach, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the same, and the medium effect symbol EZ2 is different from them. The combination of KZ3 is selected. Further, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to obtain so-called "doublets" according to the effect mode and the type of the jackpot symbol. ..

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates a special figure variation effect pattern in which the effect content of the special figure variation effect is associated with the effect mode in which the effect is staying and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. Select the special figure variation effect pattern determination table for performing the special figure variation effect pattern determination to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure variation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each special figure variation effect pattern determination table, one or a plurality of special figure variation effect pattern is set to a random number value for special figure variation effect pattern determination (special figure variation effect pattern) so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Judgment value) is distributed. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the special figure variation effect pattern as a random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern, and the special figure is based on the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern is judged.

The effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure variation effect pattern determination random number with the selected special figure variation effect pattern table in the special figure variation effect pattern determination, and determines and determines the special figure variation effect pattern. The data representing the special figure variation effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the special figure variation effect start command indicating the special figure variation effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is predetermined from the image ROM 142. The effect image of the above is read out, and the special figure variation effect is performed by the image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

In addition, the special map variation effect start command includes information regarding the effect flow associated with the special map variation pattern indicated by the special map variation effect start command. Further, in addition to the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect start command includes the special figure variation effect by the voice output from the speaker 52 and the special figure variation effect by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53. The effect content of the figure variation effect and the effect content of the special figure variation effect by the operation performed by the movable board 55k are included.

Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, the special figure variation effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed. In response to the above, the speaker 52 outputs the voice via the voice control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect by the voice), and the frame lamp 53 emits light via the sub drive board 162 (the special figure by the light emission). (Execute the variation effect) and operate the board movable body 55k (execute the special figure variation effect by the operation).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the special figure fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), it proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special figure fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special figure fluctuation The special figure variation effect end process (S4308) for ending the effect (stops the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and performs the stop display) is performed.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure variation stop command in the special figure variation effect end process, and appropriately ends the special figure variation effect based on the analysis result (effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and small symbol KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variation display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the command to end the special symbol variation effect, the image control board 140 ends the special symbol variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the game state command (NO in S4309), the process proceeds to step S4311, while if the game state command has been received (YES in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the game state command. , The game state represented by the game state command is specified, and the game state setting process for setting the game state is performed (S4310).

In the game state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "01H" in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is a high-probability high-base game state. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "02H" in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is a low-probability high-base game state.

In step S4311, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if the effect waiting command has been received (YES in S4311), the effect waiting effect waiting process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process is completed.

In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time:, for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect symbol to the start of the customer waiting effect. Set in the timer. The effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not the waiting time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, the effect waiting effect start command for starting the customer waiting effect is issued to the effect RAM 124. Set in the output buffer of.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, while if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the jackpot game accompanies the start of the jackpot game. The opening effect start process is performed (S4314).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening effect start process, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening effect according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on based on the analysis result. If you want to execute it, select the effect content of the jackpot opening effect (big hit opening effect pattern), and output the jackpot opening effect start command to start the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern. Set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game control board 100 has received the round number designation command, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the round number designation command has been received (YES in S4315), the round effect start process accompanying the start of the round game is performed. (S4316).

In the round effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect according to the round game to be started, and if it is executed, the round effect. The effect content (round effect pattern) of is selected, and the round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is completed, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending effect start process associated with the start of the ending of the jackpot game (NO). After performing S4318) and the effect mode setting process (S4319), the received command analysis process is completed.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start process, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and if it is executed. The effect content of the jackpot ending effect (big hit ending effect pattern) is selected, and the jackpot ending effect start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command in the effect mode setting process (effect mode). Process to control).

For example, if the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the effect control microcomputer 121 is set to the probability variation effect mode suggesting a high-probability high-base gaming state. Then, the effect mode flag indicating the probability change effect mode is turned on in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the probability change effect mode start command indicating that the probability change effect mode is set is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the probability variation effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending is completed. , The probability variation background image G120 is displayed as the background image, and the probability variation BGM is output as the BGM.

Further, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, or the jackpot symbol E, the effect control microcomputer 121 is in either a high-probability high-base gaming state or a low-probability high-base gaming state. Set the time saving effect mode that is difficult or impossible to determine. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the effect mode flag indicating the time reduction effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and issues a time reduction effect mode start command indicating that the time reduction effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Set to. When the time saving effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending is completed. , The time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the following, mainly, the first embodiment will be described as different from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, a time saving state is set depending on an occurrence trigger different from the jackpot winning, and in detail, a low probability high base gaming state may be set. There are two triggers other than this jackpot winning. The first trigger is that a special lost symbol is stopped and displayed. The details will be described later, but there are two types of lost symbols, a normal lost symbol and a special lost symbol, and the special symbol variable display in which the special lost symbol is stopped and displayed ends (the special lost symbol displayed as stopped is displayed). When it is confirmed), it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base game state). The second trigger is that the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times without winning a big hit in the normal probability state. This specific number of times can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, it is set to 800 times. In the normal probability state, when the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times, the time saving state (low probability high base game state) when the special figure variable display related to the specific number of times ends (the lost symbol displayed stopped is confirmed). )become.

In the following, "a special loss symbol is stopped and displayed" that triggers the occurrence of a time saving state may be referred to as "special loss". In addition, "the variable display of the special figure is executed a specific number of times without winning a big hit in the normal game state", which triggers the occurrence of the time saving state, is called "ceiling arrival", and "specific number of times" is called "ceiling". Sometimes referred to.

Furthermore, in the following, the low-probability high-base gaming state triggered by the jackpot winning will be referred to as the "big hit low-probability high-base gaming state", and the low-probability high-base gaming state triggered by the special loss will be referred to as the "special loss low probability". The low-probability high-base gaming state triggered by the arrival at the ceiling may be referred to as the "high-probability high-base gaming state". In addition, the time-saving state that constitutes the jackpot low-probability high-base gaming state is called "big hit time-saving", and the time-saving state that constitutes the special loss low-probability high-base gaming state is called "special loss time-saving". The time saving state constituting the gaming state may be referred to as "ceiling time saving".

In addition, although the details will be described later, the end condition of the big hit low probability high base game state (big hit time reduction) is that the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without winning the big hit, and the special loss low probability high base game. The end condition of the state (special loss time reduction) is that the special figure variable display is executed 700 times without winning the big hit, and the end condition of the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state (ceiling time reduction) is the big hit win. The variable display of the special figure is executed 1000 times without any problem. In the following, the number of times the special figure variable display related to the end condition of the low-probability high-based gaming state is executed is referred to as "time reduction specified number of times". Therefore, the number of time reductions specified for the jackpot time reduction (the number of times specified for the jackpot time reduction) is 100 times, the number of times specified for the special loss time reduction (the number of times specified for the special loss time reduction) is 700 times, and the number of times specified for the ceiling time reduction (the number of times specified for the ceiling time reduction). ) Is 1000 times.

Next, the jackpot symbol according to the first embodiment will be described. In the basic embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols are provided, but in the first embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols are provided. FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 48 (A), two types of jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol A and a jackpot symbol B, are provided as the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1, and the jackpot symbol D and the jackpot symbol are the jackpot symbols of the special figure 2. Two types of jackpot symbols of symbol E are provided.

As shown in FIG. 48 (A), in the first embodiment, in the jackpot symbol type determination according to the special figure 1, the jackpot symbol A is selected with a probability of 65% (= 65/100), and the jackpot symbol B is selected. Is selected with a probability of 35% (= 35/100). On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol type determination according to the special figure 2, the jackpot symbol D is selected with a probability of 65% (= 65/100), and the jackpot symbol E is selected with a probability of 35% (= 35/100).

Next, the lost symbol according to the first embodiment will be described. In the basic embodiment, two types of lost symbols, that is, a lost symbol according to the special figure 1 and a lost symbol according to the special figure 2, are provided, but in the first embodiment, three types of lost symbols are provided. .. Specifically, as the lost symbol according to the special figure 1, one kind of lost symbol of the lost symbol A is provided, and as the lost symbol related to the special figure 2, two kinds of the lost symbol B and the lost symbol C are provided. Is provided. The lost symbol A and the lost symbol B are normal lost symbols (normal lost symbols) that cannot trigger the occurrence of the time saving state, and the lost symbol C is a special lost symbol (special lost symbol) that can trigger the occurrence of the time saving state. ).

As will be described later, when the gaming control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines "missing" in the jackpot determination, the type of the lost symbol (loss symbol type) is determined based on the lost symbol type determination table. Determine the type of lost symbol. FIG. 48B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a loss symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 48 (B), the lost symbol type determination table is a lost symbol type determination table (first loss) used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed based on the winning of the first starting port 11. There are a symbol type determination table) and a lost symbol type determination table (second lost symbol type determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed based on the winning of the second starting port 12.

Further, in the first embodiment, the special symbol-related determination information also includes a lost symbol type random number (random number name: Label-TRAND-HZS, numerical range: 0 to 255) similar to the jackpot symbol type random number as a role. Then, in each lost symbol type determination table, the determination value of the lost symbol type random number (random number determination value of the lost symbol type) is distributed to the lost symbol type which is the result of the lost symbol type determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired random number of the lost symbol type with the lost symbol type determination table to determine the lost symbol type, as in the case of the jackpot symbol type determination.

As shown in FIG. 48 (B), in the first embodiment, in the loss symbol type determination according to the special figure 1, the loss symbol A is selected with a probability of 100% (= 100/100). On the other hand, in the loss symbol type determination according to the special figure 2, the loss symbol B is selected with a probability of 98% (= 98/100), and the loss symbol C is selected with a probability of 2% (= 2/100).

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table in the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the gaming state. Specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table) associated with the normal gaming state and the high-probability high-base gaming state. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (probability variation special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table) associated with the low-probability high-base gaming state are be.

The time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is further associated with the occurrence trigger and the execution order of the special figure variable display in the low-probability high-based gaming state. Specifically, the time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table includes a non-specific time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table and a specific time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. In the non-specific time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table, the occurrence trigger is a big hit, the execution order of the special figure variable display in the low probability high base game state is the 1st to 99th times, and the occurrence trigger is a special loss and reaching the ceiling. Is associated with. In the specific time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, the occurrence trigger is a big hit, and the execution order of the special figure variable display in the low probability high base game state is associated with the 100th time.

Further, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the game state, the occurrence trigger, and the execution order of the special figure variable display in the game state is further associated with the jackpot determination result. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the loss is also associated with the loss symbol type. Further, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the lost symbol B is associated with the number of reserved special figures.

Next, the main special figure 2 fluctuation pattern according to the first embodiment and the effect (variable configuration effect) constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure 2 variation pattern will be described. 49 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a normal special FIG. 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, FIG. 49 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a probability variation special FIG. 2 variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 50 (A) is a diagram. , FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the non-specific time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the specific time saving special drawing 2 variation pattern determination table.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), as the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the challenge jackpot variation is selected, the jackpot determination result is lost, and the symbol type is lost. In the case of B, the challenge loss variation is selected regardless of the number of holdings in Special Figure 2, and when the jackpot determination result is loss and the loss symbol type is loss symbol C, the challenge sudden variation is selected.

The time-saving revival challenge production is executed in the special figure fluctuation production related to any of the challenge jackpot fluctuation, the challenge loss fluctuation, and the challenge sudden fluctuation production. The content of the time-saving revival challenge production will be described later, but the time-saving revival challenge production occurs when the low-probability high-base gaming state is reached even though the low-probability high-base gaming state has ended and the normal gaming state has been entered. When the special figure 2 variable display based on the special figure 2 hold is executed, the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, and it is expected that the game returns to the low-probability and high-base gaming state.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time related to the challenge jackpot fluctuation is set to "30000 ms (= 30 seconds)", and the special figure 2 fluctuation time related to the challenge loss fluctuation is set to "20000 ms (= 20 seconds)". Special figure 2 fluctuation time related to time fluctuation is set to "25000 ms (= 25 seconds)". In addition, in the following, the challenge jackpot fluctuation, the challenge loss fluctuation, and the challenge sudden fluctuation are collectively referred to as “challenge fluctuation”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the 100th variable display of the special figure (hereinafter, also referred to as "variable display of the specific time-saving special map") after the low-probability high-base game state in which the trigger is a big hit is reached. Regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern according to Regardless of this, when the time saving end fanning loss variation is selected, and the jackpot determination result is losing and the losing symbol type is losing symbol C, the time saving ending fanning collision time variation is selected.

The time-saving end fanning effect is executed in any of the special figure fluctuation effect related to the time-saving end fanning jackpot fluctuation, the time-saving end fanning loss fluctuation, and the time-saving end fanning collision time variation. The details of the time-saving end fanning effect will be described later, but the time-saving end fanning effect is an effect of whether or not the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends in the final variable display of the special figure in the jackpot low-probability high-base game state. Is.

In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation time related to the short-time end fanning jackpot fluctuation is set to "30000 ms (= 30 seconds)", and the special figure 2 fluctuation time related to the short-time end fanning loss fluctuation is set to "25000 ms (= 25 seconds)". The special figure 2 fluctuation time related to the fluctuation at the time of the end of working hours is set to "25000 ms (= 25 seconds)". Further, in the following, the fluctuation of the short-time end fanning jackpot, the variation of the time-saving end fanning loss, and the variation of the time-saving end fanning collision are collectively referred to as the “time-saving end fanning fluctuation”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the variable display of the special figure other than the 100th time in the low-probability high-base gaming state in which the trigger of occurrence is a big hit, the special loss of the trigger of occurrence is a special loss, and the high probability of reaching the ceiling. The special figure variable display in the low probability high base game state other than the 100th special figure variable display after the base game state, in other words, the low probability high base game state where the trigger is a big hit (hereinafter, "non-specific time saving") Regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern according to "special figure variable display"), if the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, it is determined to be a predetermined reach jackpot fluctuation. In the predetermined reach jackpot fluctuation, the normal fluctuation is first performed, and then the reach is established, and then the reach effect according to the effect mode is executed.

Regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern related to the non-specific time saving special figure variable display, if the jackpot judgment result is lost and the lost symbol type is lost symbol B, the predetermined reach loss fluctuation, reach loss fluctuation, shortened A loss fluctuation, and shortening It is determined to be one of the B loss fluctuations.

The shortened A loss variation and the shortened B loss variation correspond to the normal A loss variation and the normal B loss variation, and are configured by shortening the special figure variation time of the normal A loss variation and the normal B loss variation. There is. Therefore, in the special map variation effect related to the shortened A loss variation and the special map variation effect related to the shortened B loss variation, the normal variation is performed. However, the effect time of the normal fluctuation performed by the shortened A loss fluctuation and the shortened B loss fluctuation is compared with the normal fluctuation related to the normal A loss fluctuation and the normal B loss fluctuation due to the shortened special figure fluctuation time. short. The shortened A loss variation and the shortened B loss variation may be collectively referred to as "shortened loss variation".

In addition, the predetermined reach loss fluctuation corresponds to the predetermined reach jackpot fluctuation due to the content of the production. In the special figure fluctuation effect related to the predetermined reach loss variation, the normal variation is first performed, and then the reach effect is executed according to the effect mode after the reach is established. Furthermore, in the special figure fluctuation effect related to the reach loss change, after the normal change is first performed, as a result of the reach fanning effect that incites whether or not the reach is established, the reach loss is shown without the reach being established. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the special symbol variation effect ends.

Further, regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the non-specific time saving special figure, if the jackpot determination result is lost and the lost symbol type is lost symbol C, the jackpot determination result is lost and the lost symbol type is lost symbol B. It is determined to be a shortened A loss variation or a shortened B loss variation that can be determined even in the case. Although the details will be described later, the time saving state is not newly set even if the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed in the special figure variable display other than the special figure variable display that constitutes the end condition of the low probability high base game state. In the special figure variation effect related to the special figure variable display other than the special figure variable display constituting this end condition, the normal variation is performed as in the case of the lost symbol B.

Next, the jackpot gaming state according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the jackpot game component is associated with the jackpot symbol type. FIG. 51 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot game control table according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51 (A), a jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter, also referred to as “first jackpot game”) and a jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter, “second”. In the "big hit game"), a round game is played 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game.

Further, in the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol D (hereinafter, also referred to as "fourth jackpot game") and the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter, also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), Round games are played 15 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 15R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game.

Next, the specific game state newly set by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 with the end of the jackpot game, and the end condition related to each specific game state will be described. In the first embodiment, the specific game state newly set with the end of the jackpot game and the end condition related to each specific game state are associated with the jackpot symbol type. FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game state setting table showing the relationship between the jackpot symbol type according to the first embodiment, the specific game state, and the end condition related to the specific game state.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), a high-probability high-base game state is set with the end of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol D. This high-probability high-base gaming state is composed of a high-probability state and a time-saving state. Further, no end condition is set for any of the high-probability state and the time-saving state constituting this high-probability high-base gaming state. Therefore, the high-probability high-base gaming state set based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol D can be continued until the next jackpot winning.

Further, with the end of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol E, a low probability high base game state is set. This low-probability high-based gaming state is composed of a normal probability state and a time-saving state. Further, the end condition of the time-saving state constituting this low-probability high-base gaming state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "100 times". That is, the time saving specified number of times in the time saving state relating to the jackpot symbol B and the big hit symbol E is "100 times". Therefore, the low-probability high-base gaming state set based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol E can be continued until the special symbol variable display is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot.

Next, the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process in the special symbol standby process according to the first embodiment will be described. First, the special figure 2 determination process will be described. FIG. 52 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 determination process. As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure 2 determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1621 whether or not the game state related to the jackpot probability is currently the normal probability state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the normal probability state, in step S1622, it selects the jackpot determination table for the normal probability state and proceeds to step S1624, while it is not in the normal probability state, that is, it is in the high probability state. If it is determined, in step S1623, the jackpot determination table for the high probability state is selected and the process proceeds to step S1624.

In step S1624, the game control microcomputer 101 makes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot determination table selected in step S1622 or step S1623. In the jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, collates it with the selected jackpot determination table, and collates it with the jackpot determination table. , Or a loss.

In step S1625, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the special figure 2 is selected in step S1626, and the jackpot symbol type determination is performed in step S1627.

In the jackpot symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored jackpot symbol type random number stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b and collates it with the jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, it is determined which jackpot symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines the jackpot symbol type, in step S1628, a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the determination result is determined in step S1629. The symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special diagram 2 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1625 that it is not a big hit, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the lost symbol type determination table according to the special figure 2 in step S1630, and determines the lost symbol type in step S1631.

In the loss symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored loss symbol type random number stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b and collates it with the loss symbol type determination table. Then, it is determined which type of lost symbol is used. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines the lost symbol type, in step S1632, a symbol type flag indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the determination result is obtained in step S1633. The symbol designation command indicating the lost symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special diagram 2 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1641 whether or not it is in the normal gaming state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the normal gaming state, in step S1672, it selects the above-mentioned normal special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table and proceeds to step S1678, while determining that it is not in the normal gaming state. In step S1673, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability and high base state.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1673 that it is in a high-probability high-based gaming state, in step S1674, the above-mentioned probability variation special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1678, while the high probability is high. If it is determined that the game is not in the base game state, in step S1675, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display to be started is the 100th special figure variable display after the jackpot low probability high base state is reached.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1675 that the special figure variable display is not the 100th time, in step S1676, the above-mentioned non-specific time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1678. If it is determined that the special figure variable display is the 100th time, in step S1677, the above-mentioned specific time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1678.

In step S1678, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the symbol type flag and the like, and determines whether or not the special figure 2 lottery result is a big hit. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 lottery result is a big hit, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in step S1672, step S1674, step S1676, or step S1677 in step S1679. Among them, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the jackpot is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1685. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 lottery result is not a big hit, it confirms the symbol type flag and the like in step S1680, and determines whether or not the special figure 2 lottery result is a lost symbol C. judge.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 lottery result is the lost symbol C, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination selected in any one of step S1672, step S1674, step S1676, or step S1677 in step S1681. In the table, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the lost symbol C is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1685. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 lottery result is not the lost symbol C, in step S1682, the special figure 2 hold number counter or the like is confirmed, and the special figure 2 hold number is 3 to 4. Determine if it exists.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is not 3 to 4, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination selected in any one of step S1672, step S1674, step S1676, or step S1677 in step S1683 is determined. In the table, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table in which the number of reserved special figures 2 is associated with 0 to 2 in the lost symbol B is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1685. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 3 to 4, the special figure 2 variation selected in step S1672, step S1674, step S1676, or step S1677 in step S1684. In the pattern determination table, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table in which the number of reserved special figures 2 is associated with 3 to 4 in the lost symbol B is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1685.

When the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is selected in step S1679, step S1681, step S1683, or step S1684, the game control microcomputer 101 selects special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in step S1685 based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Judgment of fluctuation pattern.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special figure fluctuation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, and reads out the special figure fluctuation. The special figure 2 variation pattern is determined by collating the pattern random number with the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 2 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer in step S1686, and sets the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1687. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special diagram 2 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment. By this special symbol confirmation process, the setting of the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol C (transition to the low probability high base game state), the judgment of whether or not the ceiling is reached, and the ceiling arrival are generated. Control is performed regarding the setting of the time saving state (transition to the low probability high base game state) as an opportunity.

In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol in step S1751, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703. It is determined whether or not the elapse (special operation counter = 0) has passed. If the game control microcomputer 101 does not end the stop display of the special symbol, the special symbol determination process is terminated, and if the stop display of the special symbol is terminated, the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is the jackpot symbol in step S1752. Judge whether or not. If it is a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1768, and if it is not a jackpot symbol, in step S1753, it is determined whether or not it is currently in the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the normal probability state, the process proceeds to step S1763, and if it is in the normal probability state, in step S1754, it is determined whether or not the time reduction state (time reduction flag is ON). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state, the process proceeds to step S1758, and if it is in the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 measures the remaining number of times (time saving remaining number) of the variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state in step S1755. The value of the time saving remaining number counter is subtracted by "1", and in step S1756, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0".

If the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number) is not "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1758, and if the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number) is "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1758. In step S1757, the non-time saving state is set (the time saving flag is turned off), and the process proceeds to step S1758.

In step S1758, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining count counter that measures the remaining number of special figure variable displays (ceiling remaining count) that can be executed until reaching the ceiling is greater than "0". do.

The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1765 if the number of remaining ceilings is not greater than "0", and subtracts "1" from the value of the remaining number of ceiling counters if the number of remaining ceilings is greater than "0" (S1759). , It is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining count counter is "0" (S1760).

If the number of remaining ceilings is not "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1765, and if the number of remaining ceilings is "0", the game control microcomputer 101 shifts from the non-time saving state to the time saving state in step S1761 (time saving flag). (Turn on), and set the time saving state by setting the time saving specified number of times "1000" times related to the end condition of the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state in the time saving remaining number counter (S1761), and in step S1762, A command indicating that the ceiling has been reached (ceiling arrival designation command) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S1763.

In step S1763, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms ON / OFF of the high probability flag and ON / OFF of the time saving flag, and sets a game state specification command indicating the current game state in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Then, in step S1764, the special operation status is changed to "1", and the special symbol confirmation process is terminated.

Further, in step S1765, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is the lost symbol C. If the game control microcomputer 101 is not the lost symbol C, the process proceeds to step S1763, and if it is the lost symbol C, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1766 whether or not it is in the non-time saving state (time saving flag is OFF).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the non-time saving state, the process proceeds to step S1763, and if it is in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts from the non-time saving state to the time saving state (turns the time saving flag ON) and special The time reduction state is set by setting the time reduction specified number of times "700" times related to the end condition of the loss low probability high base game state in the time reduction remaining number counter, and the process proceeds to step S1763.

In step S1768, the game control microcomputer 101 resets the value of the ceiling remaining number counter. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 resets the game state (sets the normal game state) in step S1769. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the high probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the value of the time saving remaining number counter to "0".

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot game preparation process in step S1770, changes the special operation status to "4" in step S1771, and ends the special symbol determination process.

In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned ON in the predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the predetermined opening time (the jackpot game is started) according to the jackpot symbol type. (Time from the start to the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the jackpot symbol type. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state to be controlled after the big hit game in the game state setting process (S1506). Here, when setting the low probability high base game state, the ceiling remaining number counter. Is set to a specific number of times related to the ceiling (800 times in the first embodiment). By this process, after the normal probability state is newly set, the number of executions of the special figure variable display related to reaching the ceiling is counted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state to be controlled after the big hit game in the game state setting process (S1506). Here, when setting the low probability high base game state, the game RAM 104 In the predetermined area, the variation count designation flag that specifies the count of the number of executions of the special figure variable display in the jackpot low probability high base gaming state is turned ON.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 is in a high-hit low-probability high-base game state when the variation count designation flag is turned on immediately before the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process are performed. The counter value of the counter (big hit time reduction number of fluctuations counting counter) for counting the number of executions of the special figure variable display (the number of big hit time reduction fluctuations) is added by "1" (not shown). Then, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines, for example, whether or not it is the 100th special figure variable display after the jackpot low probability high base gaming state is reached in step S1675, the jackpot time reduction number of fluctuations is counted. Refer to the counter value of the counter.

The jackpot time reduction fluctuation count counter is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the variation count specification flag and resets the jackpot time reduction variation count counter when the non-time reduction state is set in step S1757 and when the game state is reset in step S1769. Processing shall also be performed.

Next, the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram schematically showing a main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a normal gaming state is set as the gaming state, and a normal effect mode suggesting that the pachinko gaming machine is in the normal gaming state is set as the effect mode. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the situation in which the game progresses in this normal gaming state and the production in the normal effect mode is executed in the normal gaming state is the starting point of the game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

In the normal game state configured in the non-time saving state, the game in which the first starting port 11 is won by left-handed and the special figure 1 lottery is aimed at winning the big hit is mainly performed. When the special figure 1 lottery is executed, the special figure 1 variable display is executed. When a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 variable display, and the big hit symbol according to the special figure 1 includes a big hit symbol A and a big hit symbol B.

When the stop display of the jackpot symbol A is performed, the first jackpot game is executed, and according to the end of the first jackpot game, the high-probability high-base game state is set and the probability variation effect mode is set. That is, based on the execution of the stop display of the jackpot symbol A in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is changed to the high-probability high-base gaming state through the first jackpot game, and the probability variation effect is changed from the normal effect mode. Move to mode. In this case, the end condition is not set in the high-probability high-base game state, and the end condition is not set in the probabilistic effect mode accordingly. Therefore, when the high-probability high-base game state and the probabilistic change effect mode are set by the stop display of the jackpot symbol A, the high-probability high-base game state and the probabilistic change effect mode continue until the next big hit is won.

On the other hand, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol B is performed, the second jackpot game is executed, and according to the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability high-base game state is set and the time-saving effect mode is set. That is, based on the execution of the stop display of the jackpot symbol B in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is shifted to the low-probability high-base gaming state through the second jackpot game, and the normal effect mode is changed to the time saving effect. Move to mode. In this case, the end condition of the low-probability high-base game state (big hit low-probability high-base game state) is that the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without winning the big hit in the low-probability high-base game state. Therefore, the end condition of the time saving effect mode is also set so that the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without winning a big hit in the time saving effect mode. Therefore, when the low-probability high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode are set by the stop display of the jackpot symbol B, the special figure variable display is executed 100 times in the low-probability high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode. The low-probability, high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode continue.

Further, in the high-probability high-base game state configured in the time-saving state, the game in which the second starting opening 12 is won by right-handed and the special figure 2 lottery is aimed at winning the big hit is mainly performed. When the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the special figure 2 variable display is executed. When a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display, and the big hit symbol according to the special figure 2 includes a big hit symbol D and a big hit symbol E.

When the jackpot symbol D is stopped and displayed in the high-probability high-base game state, the third jackpot game is executed, and according to the end of the third jackpot game, the high-probability high-base game state is set and the probability variation effect mode is set. Become. That is, based on the execution of the stop display of the jackpot symbol D in the high-probability high-base gaming state, the high-probability high-base gaming state is newly set via the third jackpot game, and the probability variation effect mode is set. It is newly set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol E is stopped and displayed in the high-probability high-base game state, the fourth jackpot game is executed, and according to the end of the fourth jackpot game, the low-probability high-base game state is set and the time is shortened. Become a mode. That is, based on the execution of the stop display of the jackpot symbol E in the low-probability high-base gaming state, the high-probability high-base gaming state shifts to the low-probability high-base gaming state through the fourth jackpot game. It shifts from the probability change production mode to the time saving production mode.

Further, even in the low-probability high-base game state configured in the time-saving state, the game in which the second starting opening 12 is won by right-handed and the special figure 2 lottery is aimed at winning the big hit is mainly performed. Therefore, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol D is performed in the low-probability high-base game state, the third jackpot game is executed, and according to the end of the third jackpot game, the high-probability high-base game state is set and the probability change effect is produced. Become a mode. That is, based on the execution of the stop display of the jackpot symbol D in the low-probability high-base gaming state, the transition from the low-probability high-base gaming state to the high-probability high-base gaming state is performed through the third jackpot game. It shifts from the time saving production mode to the probability variation production mode.

On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol E is stopped and displayed in the low-probability high-base game state, the fourth jackpot game is executed, and according to the end of the fourth jackpot game, the low-probability high-base game state is set and the time is shortened. Become a mode. That is, based on the execution of the stop display of the jackpot symbol E in the low-probability high-base gaming state, the low-probability high-base gaming state is newly set via the fourth jackpot game, and the time saving effect mode is set. Newly set.

The end condition is not set for the high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability high-base game state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol D in the low-probability high-base game state, and the probability change effect mode is also ended accordingly. No conditions have been set. Therefore, when the high-probability high-base game state and the probabilistic change effect mode are set by the stop display of the jackpot symbol D, the high-probability high-base game state and the probabilistic change effect mode continue until the next big hit is won.

Further, the end condition of the low probability high base game state (big hit low probability high base game state) based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol E in the high probability high base game state and the low probability high base game state is the low probability high base. In the game state, the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without winning a big hit, and accordingly, the end condition of the time saving effect mode is also executed 100 times without winning a big hit in the time saving effect mode. It is set to be done. Therefore, when the low-probability high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode are set by the stop display of the jackpot symbol E, the special figure variable display is executed 100 times in the low-probability high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode. The low-probability, high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode continue.

Here, the stop display of the lost symbol C will be described. As described above, the stop display of the lost symbol C can trigger the occurrence of a time saving state. However, the stop display of the lost symbol C triggers the occurrence of the time saving state in principle when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the non-time saving state, and the stop display of the lost symbol C is shortened. If it is performed in the state, the stop display of the lost symbol C does not trigger the occurrence of a new time saving state. Therefore, in the high-probability high-base game state, the probability variation effect mode, the low-probability high-base game state, and the time-saving effect mode, even if the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, a new time-saving state does not occur.

However, as an exception, the 100th special figure variable display in the low probability high base game state (big hit low probability high base game state) based on the stop display of the big hit symbol B or the big hit symbol E, in other words, the last special figure variable When the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed on the display (hereinafter, also referred to as "big hit time reduction final fluctuation"), the time reduction state occurs. This is because, in the above-mentioned special symbol determination process, the special symbol is variable without winning the jackpot in the jackpot low probability high base game state before determining whether or not the stopped displayed special symbol is the lost symbol C (S1765). This is because the display is executed 100 times (the lost symbol C stopped and displayed is confirmed in the 100th variable display of the special figure), so that the non-time saving state is set (S1753 to S1756). As a result, it is internally in a non-time saving state (normal game state) for a moment, but the time saving state is set before the next special figure variable display is started based on the stop display of the lost symbol C. It will be. Therefore, in this case, the time saving state (low probability high base gaming state) is substantially continued without becoming the non-time saving state (normal gaming state). Further, the details will be described later, but in this case, the time saving effect mode is also continued.

Therefore, as a result, the special figure variable display is executed 100 times in the low-probability high-base game state based on the stop display (big hit winning) of the big hit symbol B or the big hit symbol E, and the big hit in the 100th special figure variable display. When the stop display of the symbol or the lost symbol C is not performed, in other words, when the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, the normal gaming state is established by the establishment of the end condition related to the jackpot low probability high base gaming state. However, when the normal gaming state is reached, if the special figure 2 hold that occurred in the low-probability high-based gaming state that was staying immediately before that remains, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display is displayed. Since the special figure 1 variable display is executed with priority, the special figure 2 variable display is first executed in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, while the special figure 2 variable display is being executed, the effect by the special effect mode different from the normal effect mode and the time saving effect mode, particularly the special figure variation effect is executed. Since the upper limit of the number of reserved figures 2 is set to 4, in the first embodiment, the special figure variation effect (special figure 2 variable display) is executed up to 4 times in the special effect mode. To.

Further, in the special effect mode, the special figure 2 variable display based on the special figure 2 hold is executed although it is in the normal game state, so if the big hit is won in the special effect mode, the big hit symbol D or the big hit is executed in the special figure 2 variable display. The stop display of the symbol E is performed.

Therefore, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol D is performed in the normal game state and the special effect mode, the third jackpot game is executed, and the game becomes a high-probability high-base game state according to the end of the third jackpot game. It becomes the probability change production mode. That is, based on the execution of the stop display of the jackpot symbol D in the normal gaming state and the special effect mode, the normal gaming state is shifted to the high-probability high-base gaming state through the third jackpot game, and the special It shifts from the production mode to the probabilistic production mode.

On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol E is stopped and displayed in the normal game state and the special effect mode, the fourth jackpot game is executed, and the game becomes a low-probability high-base game state according to the end of the fourth jackpot game. It becomes the time saving production mode. That is, based on the execution of the stop display of the jackpot symbol E in the normal gaming state and the special effect mode, the normal gaming state is shifted to the low-probability high-base gaming state through the fourth jackpot game, and the special It shifts from the production mode to the time saving production mode.

Further, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the normal game state and the special effect mode, the jackpot game is not executed and the time saving state is set while the normal probability state is maintained, so that the probability is high. Along with the base game state, the time saving production mode is set. That is, based on the fact that the stop display of the lost symbol C is executed in the normal game state and the special effect mode, the normal game state is shifted to the low-probability high-base game state and the special effect is performed without going through the jackpot game. It shifts from the mode to the time saving production mode.

Further, in the normal game state and the special effect mode, the special figure 2 variable display based on all the special figure 2 hold remaining when the normal game state occurs is executed, and the final special figure 2 variable display is a big hit. If the stop display of the symbol or the lost symbol C is not performed, in other words, if the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, according to the special figure 2 stop display related to the last special figure 2 variable display. , The special effect mode is changed to the normal effect mode without changing the game state.

The time saving state is set based on the stop display of the loss symbol C, and the low-probability high-base game state is set. However, as described above, the end of the low-probability high-base game state (special loss low-probability high-base game state). The condition is that the special figure variable display is executed 700 times without winning the big hit in the low probability high base game state, and accordingly, the end condition of the time saving effect mode is also without winning the big hit in the time saving effect mode. The special figure variable display is set to be executed 700 times. Therefore, when the low-probability high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode are set by the stop display of the lost symbol C, the special figure variable display is executed 700 times in the low-probability high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode. The low-probability, high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode continue.

In addition, even in the special loss low-probability high-base game state, as in the case of the big-hit low-probability high-base game state, the game is centered on a game in which the second starting opening 12 is won by right-handed and the special figure 2 lottery is aimed at winning the big hit. Will be done in. Therefore, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol D is performed in the special figure 2 variable display, the game shifts to the high-probability high-base game state and also shifts to the probability variation effect mode via the third jackpot game. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol E is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display, the low-probability high-base gaming state is newly set and the time-saving effect mode is newly set via the fourth jackpot game. ..

Here, the explanation regarding the game flow is returned to the normal game state, which is the starting point of the game flow, and the normal effect mode. As described above, when the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times (800 times) without winning a big hit in the normal probability state, the time saving state is set by reaching the ceiling. Therefore, after the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the normal gaming state is set, if the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times (800 times) without winning the jackpot, the time saving state is set. In this case, since the normal probability state constituting the normal game state is maintained, the normal game state is changed to the low probability high base game state by reaching the ceiling.

When reaching the ceiling, it is based on a low probability and high probability according to the end of the variable display of the special figure related to the specified number of times (hereinafter, also referred to as "variation of reaching the ceiling") (the lost symbol that was stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special figure is confirmed). Along with the game state, the ceiling effect mode is changed from the normal effect mode, the time saving effect mode, or the special effect mode. That is, based on reaching the ceiling in the normal game state and the normal effect mode, the normal game state is changed to the low-probability high-base game state, and the normal effect mode is changed to the ceiling effect mode without going through the jackpot game. do. The details of the effect by the ceiling effect mode, especially the special figure variation effect, will be described later, but the ceiling effect mode is an effect mode associated with the high-base game state with a low probability of reaching the ceiling, and the low probability generated by reaching the ceiling. It suggests that it is in a high-base gaming state.

The time saving state is set based on the arrival at the ceiling, and the low probability high base game state is set. However, as described above, the end condition of the low probability high base game state (the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state) is the low probability. In the high-base game state, the special figure variable display is executed 1000 times without winning a big hit, and accordingly, the end condition of the ceiling effect mode is 1000 special figure variable display without winning a big hit in the ceiling effect mode. It is set to be executed once. Therefore, when the low-probability high-base game state and the ceiling effect mode are entered by reaching the ceiling, the low-probability high-base game state and the special figure variable display are executed 1000 times in the low-probability high-base game state and the ceiling effect mode. The game state and the ceiling effect mode continue.

Even in the low-probability high-base game state where the ceiling is reached, as in the case of the high-probability high-base game state, the game that aims to win the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery by hitting the right to win the second starting port 12 is mainly performed. Will be. Therefore, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol D is performed in the special figure 2 variable display, the game shifts to the high-probability high-base game state and also shifts to the probability variation effect mode via the third jackpot game. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol E is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display, the low-probability high-base gaming state is newly set via the fourth jackpot game, and the mode shifts to the time-saving effect mode.

Further, considering that the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the normal probability state is 220/65536 (≈1/298), the specific number of times for reaching the ceiling is 800 times, and the high probability base game with low probability of reaching the ceiling. Since the specified number of time reductions related to the state is 1000 times, it is difficult to assume that the final 1000th special figure variable display will be executed in the ceiling reach low probability high base game, but it is assumed that the ceiling reach low probability high base game. The special figure variable display is executed 1000 times without winning a big hit in the state and the ceiling effect mode, and the stop display of the lost symbol C is displayed in the 1000th special figure variable display (hereinafter, also referred to as "ceiling time reduction final fluctuation"). If it is done, a new time saving state is set and it becomes a low probability high base game state and is substantially low probability high base, as in the case where the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed due to the big hit time saving final fluctuation. As the game state continues, the ceiling effect mode shifts to the time saving effect mode.

Alternatively, if the special figure variable display is executed 1000 times in the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state and the ceiling effect mode, and the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol C stop display is not performed due to the final change in the ceiling time reduction, it is paraphrased. When the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, the normal game state is set according to the end of the final change in the ceiling time reduction. Then, at this time, if the special figure 2 hold remains, the ceiling effect mode is switched to the special effect mode. Then, in the normal game state and the special effect mode, the special figure 2 variable display is executed. The subsequent game flow is as described above. Therefore, for example, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the special figure 2 variable display, the time saving state is set while the normal probability state is maintained, and the normal game state is changed to the low probability high base game state. At the same time, the normal production mode is changed to the time saving production mode.

Further, after the normal probability state is set, the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times (800 times) to reach the ceiling. In this normal probability state setting, the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol E are stopped. It also includes setting a low probability high base game state by the end of the jackpot game based on the display. This is because the normal probability state constitutes a low probability high base game state.

Therefore, when the end condition of the jackpot low probability high base gaming state is satisfied and then the normal gaming state and the normal production mode are entered as described above, the jackpot low probability high base gaming state is set and then the jackpot. When the special figure variable display is executed 800 times without winning, the ceiling is reached. In this case, since the special figure variable display is executed 100 times in the jackpot low probability high base game state, the special figure variable display is executed 700 times in the normal game state and in the normal effect mode without winning the big hit. Will reach the ceiling when it is done.

Further, as described above, even if the end condition of the jackpot low probability high base gaming state is satisfied, if the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the jackpot time reduction final fluctuation of the jackpot low probability high base gaming state, it is substantially. The low-probability, high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode continue. In this case, since the specified number of time reductions for the special figure variable display related to the low-probability high-base gaming state based on the stop display of the lost symbol C is 700 times, no big hit is won in the special lost low-probability high-base gaming state. When the special figure variable display is executed 700 times, the normal game state is set due to the satisfaction of the end condition. However, since the big hit low probability high base game state was set before that, it means that the special figure variable display was executed 800 times without winning the big hit, so the big hit must be won by the special figure variable display. For example, the ceiling will be reached when the end condition of the special loss low probability high base game state is satisfied. As a result, when the normal probability state is maintained, the time saving state is newly set by reaching the ceiling, and the low probability high base game state is changed again, and the time saving effect mode is changed to the ceiling effect mode.

In the first embodiment, the 800th special figure variable display after the jackpot low probability high base game state is set is the last special figure variable that constitutes the establishment of the end condition of the special loss low probability high base game state. When the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed during the display (hereinafter, also referred to as "special loss time reduction final fluctuation"), in other words, when both the ceiling arrival condition and the special loss condition are satisfied, the ceiling is reached. Priority is given to the establishment of. Therefore, the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the final change in the special loss time reduction, but when the ceiling is reached, the time reduction specified number of times is changed to the low probability high base game state of 1000 times, and the time reduction effect mode is changed to the ceiling effect mode. ..

In addition, the jackpot low-probability high-base game state has changed to the normal game state, but when the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed in the special effect mode, the special loss causes the low-probability high-base game state. Here, since the specified number of time reductions related to the low-probability high-base gaming state is 700 times, for example, if the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed in the fourth special figure 2 variable display in the special effect mode, it is before that. The special loss low-probability high-base game state can be continued from the time when the jackpot low-probability high-base game state is reached until the 804th special figure variable display is executed. However, in this case, even if the special figure variable display is not executed the specified number of times (700 times) in the special loss low probability high base game state, the jackpot low probability high base game state before that is set. When the 800th variable display of the special figure is completed, the ceiling is reached, the time saving state due to reaching the ceiling is newly set, and the time saving effect mode is changed to the ceiling effect mode.

Here, when the low-probability high-base game state based on various occurrences of the jackpot low-probability high-base game state, the special loss low-probability high-base game state, and the ceiling-reaching low-probability high-base game state changes to the normal game state. Explain the susceptibility to special loss (possibility of special loss). In the following, in the low-probability high-base gaming state based on various occurrence triggers, the normal gaming state without a big hit winning or a special loss may be referred to as "time saving omission".

As described above, the loss of time reduction means that the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed due to the final change of time reduction related to the low-probability high-base gaming state based on various occurrence triggers. Then, as the special figure 2 fluctuation time related to each time reduction final variation, 25 seconds is always set when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed due to the jackpot time reduction final variation. On the other hand, if the loss symbol B is stopped and displayed due to the special loss time reduction final change and the ceiling time reduction time reduction final change, if the number of special figure 2 holdings is 0 to 2, it is determined to be 50 seconds with a probability of 5%. 10% probability is determined to be 10 seconds, 65% probability is determined to be 6 seconds, 15% probability is determined to be 3 seconds, and if the number of special figures 2 held is 3 to 4, 5%. With a probability of 50 seconds, with a probability of 10%, with a probability of 10 seconds, with a probability of 15%, with a probability of 6 seconds, and with a probability of 65%, with a probability of 3 seconds. Therefore, when the loss symbol B is stopped and displayed, there is a possibility that the jackpot time reduction final fluctuation will be longer than the special loss time reduction final fluctuation and the ceiling time reduction final fluctuation regardless of the number of holdings in Special Figure 2. Extremely expensive.

Here, in the special figure 2 lottery performed in the normal game state immediately after the time reduction, the probability of being determined as the lost symbol C is the same regardless of the occurrence trigger related to the low probability high base game state immediately before that. The larger the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 when the time is shortened, the higher the possibility that a special loss will occur in the normal game state immediately after the time reduction. And, considering that the longer the special figure fluctuation time of the time saving final fluctuation is, the easier it is to accumulate the special figure 2 hold until the time saving is lost due to the time saving final fluctuation, the special loss time saving final fluctuation and the ceiling time saving time saving final fluctuation are more than. The final fluctuation of the jackpot time reduction is more likely to result in a special loss in the normal game state immediately after the reduction of working hours.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold does not remain at the end of the big hit time reduction final change and the ceiling time reduction final change, the normal game state is set and the normal effect mode is set.

Next, the background image associated with each effect mode will be described. As described in the basic embodiment, a basic background image is set in each effect mode, and when the first stage portion of the special figure variation effect is mainly executed, the entire display unit 50a is displayed. The basic background image is displayed, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed superimposed on the basic background image.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a basic background image in various effect modes. 56 (A) to 56 (E) are the same as FIGS. 18 (A) to 18 (E) according to the basic embodiment. FIG. 56A shows a first normal background image G111 which is a basic background image in the first normal effect mode, and FIG. 56B shows a second background image which is a basic background image in the second normal effect mode. A normal background image G112 is represented, FIG. 56 (C) represents a third normal background image G113 which is a basic background image in the third normal effect mode, and FIG. 56 (D) is a basic background image in the probability variation effect mode. A probabilistic background image G120, which is a background image, is represented, and FIG. 56 (E) represents a time-saving background image G130, which is a basic background image in the time-saving effect mode. Further, FIG. 56 (F) shows a special background image G140 which is a basic background image in the special effect mode, and FIG. 56 (G) shows a ceiling background image G150 which is a basic background image in the ceiling effect mode. Represents. The specific display contents of the various background images G111, G112, G113, G120, G130, G140, and G150 can be appropriately changed.

Next, in the time saving effect mode, the special effect mode, and the ceiling effect mode, the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 that are stopped and displayed according to the special symbol stop display will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, basically, the effect symbol EZ1 shows the special figure lottery result (big hit judgment result, big hit symbol type judgment result, lost symbol type judgment result) in response to the special figure stop display. -EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 (sub-symbol SZ) are stopped and displayed. Then, in the first embodiment, in general, a number portion constituting the identification information related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 to be stopped and displayed, and a number portion constituting the identification information related to the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Will be the same. However, in the time saving effect mode, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the special figure 2 variable display, the numerical part constituting the identification information related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 to be stopped and displayed and the stop display are displayed. It is different from the numerical part constituting the identification information related to the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3.

The combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 (sub-symbols SZ) to be stopped and displayed is determined by the effect control microcomputer 121. The effect control microcomputer 121 determines a combination of identification information indicated by the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 to be stopped and displayed, and a combination (numbers) of identification information indicated by the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed, using the sub-symbol determination table. do. In the following, the combination of the identification information indicated by the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 to be stopped and displayed, and the combination (number) of the identification information indicated by the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed may be simply referred to as "sub-symbol combination". be.

The sub-symbol determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123, and is associated with the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. In addition, some of the sub-symbol determination tables associated with the special symbol type are also associated with the special symbol variation pattern.

FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a sub-symbol determination table associated with the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol D, and FIG. 57 (B) is associated with the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol E. FIG. 57 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-symbol determination table, and is a diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-symbol determination table associated with the lost symbol A of the reach loss variation and the lost symbol B. Further, FIG. 58 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a loss symbol A and a sub-symbol determination table associated with the loss symbol B other than the reach loss variation, and FIG. 58 (B) is a shortened loss variation. , And a diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-symbol determination table associated with the loss symbol C of the ultra-shortened loss variation, FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the associated symbol determination table for effect.

As shown in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (B), when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 each have the same number (so-called "doublet"). It is stopped and displayed by "eyes"), and as a whole, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the same combination (display mode). Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), when the lost symbols A and the lost symbols B are stopped and displayed due to the reach loss fluctuation, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are each left effect symbols. EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, and the left small symbol KZ1 and the right small symbol KZ3 have the same number, and the medium effect symbol EZ2 and the small and medium size symbol KZ2 are the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, and the left small symbol KZ1. And the right small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed with different numbers, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the same combination (display mode) as a whole.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the loss symbol A due to the loss variation other than the reach loss variation, specifically, the normal loss variation, the shortened loss variation, the ultra-shortened loss variation, the shortened working hours loss variation, and the challenge loss variation. , And when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed, all of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and all of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are different numbers (so-called) for the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, respectively. It is stopped and displayed in the "random number"), and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the same combination (display mode) as a whole.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), when the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the shortened loss fluctuation and the ultra-shortened loss fluctuation, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are produced. All of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and all of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with different numbers (so-called "barracuda eyes"), but as a whole, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are different combinations ( It will be stopped and displayed in the display mode).

In addition, the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 when the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the shortened loss fluctuation or the ultra-shortened loss fluctuation is the loss symbol A due to the loss fluctuation other than the reach loss fluctuation such as the shortened loss fluctuation or the ultra-shortened loss fluctuation. , And is one of the combinations of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed. However, the combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is a combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 that are not stopped and displayed when the lost symbol A and the lost symbol B are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 when the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the shortened loss fluctuation or the ultra-shortened loss fluctuation is exclusively for the lost symbol C due to the shortened loss fluctuation or the ultra-shortened loss fluctuation. Therefore, at least when the combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 that have been stopped and displayed is different from the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, it can be recognized that the lost symbol C has been stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the shortened loss variation and the ultra-shortened loss variation for the loss symbol C are the special figure 2 variable display in the time reduction state (low probability high base game state, high probability high base game state) other than the big hit time reduction final change. .. Therefore, if the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed in all the special figure 2 variable display in the time saving state (low probability high base game state, high probability high base game state) other than the big hit time saving final fluctuation, FIG. 58 (B). As shown in the above, the stop display of the sub symbol SZ is performed so that the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are different. Furthermore, in particular, when the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed in the special figure variable display other than the time saving final change in various low-probability high-based gaming states, it is determined to be the shortened loss change as the special figure change pattern, and in this case, the time saving state is set. Because it does not, it is a special symbol variation effect according to the special symbol variable display other than the time saving final variation in various low probability high base game states, and it is a combination dedicated to the loss symbol C that is different from the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (display mode). The fact that the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed indicates that the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed, but the time saving state (low probability high base game state) is not newly entered (the losing symbol C derivation time saving state is not executed). (Direction) is composed. In addition, the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display other than the time-saving final fluctuation in various low-probability and high-base gaming states is originally (basically). ) It is a combination that can appear when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the fact that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the combination (6, 3.1) suggests that the jackpot game is not executed or the time is shortened because it is a lost symbol. It constitutes a loss pattern derivation effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the time-saving end-time fluctuation and the challenge collision fluctuation, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are respectively. The left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, and the left small symbol KZ1 and the right small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed with different numbers. The loss symbol C due to sudden fluctuations is stopped and displayed with a dedicated symbol (special loss dedicated symbol G37 described later), and the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped in the same combination (display mode) as a whole. It will be displayed. It should be noted that the "directed symbol" and the "dedicated" described in the "small symbol" in FIG. That is.

Here, when the big hit time reduction final fluctuation and the lost symbol C are stopped and displayed in the normal game state, it is determined as the time reduction end fanning collision time fluctuation and the challenge collision time fluctuation as the special symbol fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the time reduction state. Therefore, in the final fluctuation of the jackpot time reduction and the special figure fluctuation effect according to the special figure 2 variable display in the normal game state, the loss symbol C is combined with the special symbol (special loss dedicated symbol G37 described later). In the (display mode), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, respectively. It constitutes an effect (a loss symbol C derivation time saving state execution effect) that suggests that the game state).

In the effect control microcomputer 121, for example, in the special symbol variation effect start process in step S4306, the symbol type (big hit symbol type, loss) indicated by the symbol designation command received and stored after the special symbol variation effect pattern is determined. Sub-symbol determination is performed based on the symbol type), the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, and the game state indicated by the set game status flag. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the sub-symbol combination designation command indicating the sub-symbol determination result in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the sub-symbol combination designation command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is predetermined from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 appropriately displays the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed by the display unit 50a will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 75. 59 and 60 are diagrams showing specific examples of the effects executed in the overall time-saving effect mode related to the jackpot low-probability high-base gaming state, and FIG. A diagram showing a specific example of the effect executed in the case, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a specific example of the effect executed when a normal loss occurs in the special figure variation effect of the big hit time reduction final fluctuation, and FIG. Special figure of final fluctuation It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect which is executed when the special loss occurs in the variation effect. In the following, the time-saving effect mode related to the jackpot low-probability high-base gaming state may be referred to as the “big hit time-saving effect mode”. In addition, the display of the hold icon and the icon is omitted.

In the time saving effect mode, basically, the time saving background image G130 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are executed superimposed on the time-saving background image G130. Further, in the low-probability high-base game state, it is basically advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by right-handed, so in the time-saving effect mode, the image G30 (right-handed) for encouraging "right-handed" is used. The accelerated image G30) is superimposed on the time-saving background image G130. The display content of the right-handed promotion image G30 is not particularly limited, but in the first embodiment, the right-handed promotion image G30 is composed of an image in which the character "right-handed" is included in the right arrow.

Further, in the jackpot time saving effect mode, the number of special figure variable displays that can be executed until the end of the low probability high base game state is superimposed on the time saving background image G130, in other words, the low probability high base. An image G31 (time saving remaining number image G31) showing the remaining number of times (time saving remaining number) of the special figure variable display in the game state is displayed. The display mode of the remaining working hours image G31 can be appropriately set within a range in which the player can grasp the remaining working hours, but in the first embodiment, it is composed of the characters "○○ times remaining". ing. The number of remaining time reductions is displayed in this "○○" part.

Since the specified number of time reductions related to the jackpot low probability high base game state is 100 times, when the jackpot time reduction effect mode is set according to the end of the jackpot game, the part representing the time reduction remaining number in the image G31 is the part indicating the time reduction remaining number. It starts from "100". After that, each time the special figure variation effect is started, the portion representing the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction remaining number image G31 is reduced by "1".

Here, it is assumed that the special figure 2 variable display of the shortened loss variation in which the loss symbol B is stopped and displayed is currently being executed in the jackpot time reduction effect mode. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), on the display unit 50a, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are superimposed on the time-saving background image G130. It has been. Further, it is assumed that the special figure 2 variable display during this execution is the 50th special figure variable display in the jackpot time saving effect mode. That is, it is assumed that the number of remaining time reductions is 50 times without including the special figure 2 variable display during execution. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the portion (number portion) indicating the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction remaining number image G31 represents “50”.

Then, when the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed. A combination of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that makes a sub-symbol determination based on the sub-symbol determination table associated with the loss symbol B of the shortened loss variation (other than the reach loss variation) when the effect is started, and displays the stop display. And the combination of small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is determined. Here, it is assumed that the effect control microcomputer 121 is determined to be "6.3.1" as a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 to be stopped and displayed and a combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 (see FIG. 58 (A)). ). Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), according to the stop display of the lost symbol B, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are combined and stopped and displayed at "6.3.1".

Subsequently, assuming that the special figure 2 variable display of the shortened loss variation that is stopped and displayed by the loss symbol C is started, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are started. Fluctuation display of is started. Further, since the special figure variable display is newly executed and the time reduction remaining number is reduced by one, the portion (number part) indicating the time saving remaining number in the special figure 2 variable display is started. ) Decreases by "1" to "49".

Then, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed. When the production is started, the sub-symbol determination is performed based on the sub-symbol determination table associated with the loss symbol C of the shortened loss fluctuation, and the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 to be stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to Determine the combination of KZ3. Here, according to the sub-symbol determination table associated with the loss symbol C of the shortened loss fluctuation, the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 "6.3.1" and the combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 (6.1. 3) is determined (see FIG. 58 (C)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), according to the stop display of the lost symbol C, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in combination "6.3.1", and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are combined in "6".・ Stop display at "1 ・ 3".

After that, it is assumed that the special figure variable display continues to be executed without winning the big hit in the big hit time saving effect mode, and the 99th special figure variable display is started in the big hit time saving effect mode. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are started. Then, assuming that this special figure variable display is executed by the shortened loss fluctuation in which the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), a predetermined shortened loss is performed according to the stop display of the lost symbol B. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed by the sub-symbol combination associated with the loss symbol B of the fluctuation (other than the reach loss fluctuation).

Subsequently, assuming that the special figure 2 variable display is started as the final special figure 2 variable display in the jackpot time saving effect mode, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the special figure 2 variable display is started. , The variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are started. Further, the portion (numerical part) indicating the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction remaining number image G31 is reduced by "1" to "0".

As described above, the special figure fluctuation time of the jackpot time reduction final fluctuation is 30 seconds in the case of the time reduction end fanning jackpot fluctuation related to the jackpot, and 25 seconds in the case of the time saving end fanning loss fluctuation related to the loss symbol B. It is 25 seconds in the case of the time-saving end fanning collision time fluctuation related to the symbol C. Then, in this jackpot time saving final variation (time saving end fanning variation), an effect of inciting the end of the low-probability high-base game state (time saving end fanning effect) is executed.

Although the detailed description of the effect of the time-saving end fanning effect is omitted, the time-saving end fanning effect is composed of moving images and is performed by the entire display unit 50a. Therefore, when the final variation of the one big hit time reduction is started, the background image G130 for the time reduction is switched to the time reduction end fanning effect image G131. Then, when the image is switched to the reduced working hours end fanning effect image G131, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been variablely displayed are hidden.

The time-saving end fanning effect is either a time-saving end fanning jackpot fluctuation related to a jackpot, a time-saving ending fanning loss variation related to the loss symbol B, or a time-saving end fanning collision time variation related to the loss symbol C. Even in that case, the same production content will proceed until the end of the game. Then, at the end of the time-saving end fanning effect, the effect content suggesting that the special figure lottery result is a big hit according to the special figure fluctuation pattern including the special figure lottery result, and the special figure lottery result is the lost symbol B. Therefore, the effect content suggesting that the time-saving effect mode (low-probability high-base game state) ends, and the special figure lottery result is the lost symbol C, so the time-saving effect mode (low-probability high-base game state) continues. It branches to the suggested production content.

In the time-saving end-fanning effect in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, after the turning point of the effect content, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), after the movable body effect as shown in FIG. 28 (B) is executed, the moving body effect is executed. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the state of being temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot (display mode) appear, and as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 directly indicate the jackpot (display mode). ), And the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed in the same combination (display mode) as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

In the case of the time-saving end fanning effect, in the case of the time-saving end fanning effect, after the turning point of the effect content, as shown in FIG. Direction) is executed. The effect content of the time-saving effect mode end suggestion effect can be appropriately set as long as the player can grasp that the time-saving effect mode ends, but in the first embodiment, the time-saving effect mode called "time-saving effect mode end" is used. It is composed of the display of the image G33 (time saving effect mode end suggestion effect image G33) representing the phrase suggesting the end of.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the time saving effect mode end suggestion effect is being executed, an effect (result notification effect) for notifying a predetermined result regarding the game is executed. The result notification effect is composed of a display of an image G34 (result notification effect image G34) for notifying a predetermined result. It should be noted that the predetermined result related to the result notification effect can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, the jackpot from the time when the normal game state was before this to the time when the normal game state is immediately after this. It consists of the total number of game balls acquired in the game and the number of winning jackpots.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62C, on the display unit 50a, an image G35 (fusuma image G35) representing a pair of left and right sliding doors appears so that the sliding doors are closed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and Except for the right-handed promotion image G30, the entire display unit 50a such as the time saving effect mode end suggestion effect image G33 and the result notification effect image G34 is hidden. After the state in which the entire display unit 50a is hidden continues for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the sliding door image G35 disappears by opening the sliding door image G35, and the entire display unit 50a appears. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) indicating loss appears. Further, the special background image G140 is displayed as a background image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), according to the stop display of the lost symbol B, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination (display mode) indicating the loss are completely and deterministically as they are. The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the right-handed promotion image G30 disappears. After that, the special figure variation effect by the special effect mode is executed according to the special figure 2 variable display. The special figure variation effect by the special effect mode will be described later.

In addition, in the time-saving end fanning effect in the case of the time-saving end fanning change, after the turning point of the production content, first, as shown in FIG. Similarly, the time saving effect mode end suggestion effect is executed. Subsequently, when the time saving effect mode end suggestion effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), it is suggested that the time saving effect mode does not end, in other words, it is denied that the time saving effect mode ends (in other words, the time saving effect mode ends. The effect to be withdrawn (time saving effect mode end denial effect) is executed.

The production content of the time-saving effect mode end denial effect can be appropriately set as long as the player can understand that the time-saving effect mode has not ended, in other words, that the time-saving effect mode has been denied to end. However, in the first embodiment, it is composed of the display of the image G36 (the time saving effect mode end negative effect image G36) representing the phrase "not". If the phrase "do not" related to the time-saving effect mode end negative effect image G36 is followed by the phrase "time-saving effect mode end" related to the time-saving effect mode end suggestion effect image G33, the time-saving effect mode "does not end" ends. The phrase that denies (withdraws) that is completed.

After the time saving effect mode end denial effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the sliding door image G35 is closed so that the sliding door image G35 is closed in the same manner as the time saving effect fanning effect in the case of the time saving end fanning loss fluctuation. Except for the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and the right-handed promotion image G30, the entire display unit 50a such as the time saving effect mode end suggestion effect image G33 and the time reduction effect mode end negative effect image G36 is hidden. After the state in which the entire display unit 50a is hidden continues for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the sliding doors related to the sliding door image G35 are opened and the entire display unit 50a appears. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) indicating a special loss appear. Further, in this case, since the time saving effect mode continues thereafter, the time saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed in combination (display mode) indicating a special loss according to the stop display of the lost symbol C are completely and deterministically as they are. The stop display is performed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In this case, since the time saving state continues thereafter, the right-handed promotion image G30 is displayed as it is. After that, the game progresses in the special loss low probability high base game state, and the effect by the time saving effect mode is executed.

As described above, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed due to the final change in the jackpot time, the special lost image G37 (special lost symbol G37) indicating the special lost is the medium effect symbol EZ2 and the small and medium-sized symbol. It is stopped and displayed as KZ2. The specific display content of the special loss-dedicated symbol G37 can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, the ellipse is composed of an image in which the characters "sudden time" are included. Further, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed due to the final change in the jackpot time reduction, the result notification effect is not executed as in the case where the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed.

Next, the effect in the special effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a specific example of a time-saving revival challenge effect executed in the first special figure variation effect in the special effect mode, and FIG. 65 is a case where a normal loss occurs in a special figure variation effect other than the last in the special effect mode. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example of the time-saving revival challenge effect executed in the above, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example of the time-saving revival challenge effect executed when a normal loss occurs in the final special figure fluctuation effect in the special effect mode. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example of a time saving revival challenge effect executed when a special loss occurs in the special figure variation effect in the special effect mode. In FIGS. 64 to 67, the hold icon and the display of the icon are omitted.

As described above, when the end condition related to the jackpot low probability high base gaming state is satisfied, the normal gaming state is set. In detail, when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed due to the final change in the jackpot time reduction, the special symbol variable display can be executed in the normal game state. Then, if there is a special figure 2 hold when the normal game state is reached, the special effect mode is set, and the special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that existed (remained) at that time is in the normal game state. When executed in, the special figure variation effect by the special effect mode is executed.

As described above, the special figure fluctuation time related to the special figure 2 variable display in the normal gaming state is 30 seconds in the case of the challenge big hit change related to the big hit, and 20 seconds in the case of the challenge lost change related to the lost symbol B. In the case of a sudden change in the challenge related to the lost symbol C, it is 25 seconds (see FIG. 49 (A)). Then, in the special figure 2 variable display (challenge fluctuation) in the normal gaming state, an effect (short-time revival challenge effect) is executed that encourages the possibility of returning (recovering) to the low-probability high-base gaming state. Since the upper limit of the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 is set to 4, in the special effect mode, the time saving revival challenge effect is executed up to 4 times.

As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in the final special figure variation effect in the time saving effect mode, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) that superimposes a loss on the special background image G140. When the special figure 2 variable display is started after the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed, the special figure variation effect (time saving revival challenge effect) by the special effect mode is started. Then, when the special symbol variation effect (time saving revival challenge effect) by the special effect mode is started, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the effect display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are started. Is started.

In addition, in the first special figure variation effect (time saving revival challenge effect) by the special effect mode, an effect suggesting that the special effect mode has been started (special effect mode start suggestion effect) is executed first. The specific effect content of the special effect mode start suggestion effect can be appropriately set as long as the player can grasp that the special effect mode has started. However, in the first embodiment, the special figure in the special effect mode is used. It is composed of a display of an image G38 (special effect mode start suggestion effect image G38) representing the name of the variable effect (time saving revival challenge effect). In the second and subsequent time-saving revival challenge productions, the special production mode start suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, although the detailed description of the effect of the time-saving revival challenge effect is omitted, the time-saving revival challenge effect is composed of moving images, and as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the entire display unit 50a is used as the special background image G140. Will be done. Then, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are naturally hidden immediately after the start of the variable display.

The time-saving revival challenge production is the same until the end of the game regardless of whether it is a challenge jackpot fluctuation related to a jackpot, a challenge loss fluctuation related to a lost symbol B, or a challenge sudden fluctuation related to a lost symbol C. It will proceed with the contents of the production. Then, at the end of the time-saving revival challenge production, the production content suggesting that the special figure lottery result is a big hit according to the special figure fluctuation pattern including the special figure lottery result, and the special figure lottery result is the lost symbol B. Therefore, the effect content that suggests that it will not return (do not revive) to the time saving effect mode (low probability high base game state), and the special figure lottery result is a lost symbol C, so it will be in the time saving effect mode (low probability high base game state). It branches into the production content that suggests returning (reviving).

In the time-saving revival challenge production in the case of a challenge jackpot fluctuation, after the turning point of the production content, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), after the movable body production as shown in FIG. 28 (B) is executed, the jackpot is hit. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the state of being temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination (display mode) shown appear, and as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are completely and deterministically stopped and displayed. At the same time, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed in the same combination (display mode) as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

Time saving revival in case of challenge loss fluctuation In the challenge production, after the turning point of the production content, first, as shown in Fig. 65 (A), the time saving production mode (low probability high base game state) is not returned (does not revive). (Time saving effect mode revival failure suggestion effect) is executed. The production content of the time-saving effect mode revival failure suggestion effect can be appropriately set as long as it can be understood that the player does not return (does not revive) to the time-saving effect mode (low probability high base game state). In the first embodiment, the image G39 (the time-saving effect mode revival failure suggestion effect image G39) representing the phrase “time-saving revival challenge failure” is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the sliding door image G35 appears on the display unit 50a so that the sliding doors are closed while the time saving effect mode revival failure suggestion effect is being executed, and the small symbol KZ1 appears. -Except for KZ3, the entire display unit 50a such as the time-saving effect mode revival failure suggestion effect image G39 is hidden. After the state in which the entire display unit 50a is hidden continues for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the sliding doors related to the sliding door image G35 are opened and the entire display unit 50a appears. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) indicating loss appears. Further, if the special figure 2 hold remains at this time, the special background image G140 is displayed as the background image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination (display mode) indicating the loss according to the stop display of the lost symbol B are completely and deterministically displayed as they are. In addition to displaying the stop, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed in the same combination (display mode) as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the special figure variation effect (time saving revival challenge effect) in the special effect mode is executed again in response to the start of the special figure 2 variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), after the time saving effect mode revival failure suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the entire display unit 50a is hidden by the fusuma image G35. If the special figure 2 hold does not remain after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the special figure 2 hold remains when the sliding door related to the sliding door image G35 opens and the entire display unit 50a appears. Similar to the case, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) indicating loss appears, but the first normal background image G111 is displayed as the background image. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), according to the stop display of the lost symbol B, the temporary stop display is performed in a combination (display mode) indicating the loss superimposed on the first normal background image G111. The symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are completely and deterministically stopped and displayed as they are, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed in the same combination (display mode) as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. The special effect mode ends and the normal effect mode is set by stopping and displaying the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 in a combination (display mode) indicating a loss on the first normal background image G111. Become. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the special figure variation effect by the normal effect mode is started in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable display.

In addition, in the time-saving revival challenge production in the case of a sudden change in the challenge, after the turning point of the production content, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the time-saving production mode (low probability high base game state) is returned (recovered). ) The effect suggesting that (time saving effect mode revival success suggestion effect) is executed. The production content of the time-saving effect mode revival success suggestion effect can be appropriately set as long as it can be grasped that the player returns (revives) to the time-saving effect mode (low probability high base game state). In one embodiment, the image G40 representing the phrase "successful time saving revival challenge" (time saving effect mode revival success suggestion effect image G40) is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the sliding door image G35 appears on the display unit 50a so that the sliding doors are closed while the time saving effect mode revival success suggestion effect is being executed, and the small symbol KZ1 appears. -Except for KZ3, the entire display unit 50a such as the time-saving effect mode revival success suggestion effect image G40 is hidden. After the state in which the entire display unit 50a is hidden continues for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the sliding doors related to the sliding door image G35 are opened and the entire display unit 50a appears. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) indicating a special loss appear. Further, since the low-probability high-base game state is set and the time-saving effect mode is set due to the special loss, the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination (display mode) indicating the special loss according to the stop display of the lost symbol C are completely and deterministic as they are. The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the special figure variation effect by the time saving effect mode is executed according to the start of the special figure 2 variable display. In addition, the right-handed promotion image G30 is also displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73, a specific example of the effect executed when the player reaches the ceiling in the normal game state and becomes the low-probability high-base game state will be described. 68 and 69 are diagrams showing specific examples of the effects executed in the normal effect mode in general, and FIG. 70 shows the ceiling reached from the normal game state (normal effect mode) to the low-probability high-base game state (ceiling effect). It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect which is executed when it becomes a mode).

Here, at present, the special figure 1 variable display of the normal loss fluctuation is executed in the normal game state, and in the normal effect mode, the special figure 1 variable display is superimposed on the first normal background image G111 based on the special figure 1 variable display. Figure It is assumed that the fluctuation effect is being executed. Further, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display during execution is the 789th special figure variable display in the normal gaming state (normal probability state). That is, in the situation where the ceiling is reached and the low-probability high-base game state is set when the special figure 1 variable display of the loss fluctuation is executed 11 more times including the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed. Suppose there is.

As shown in FIG. 68 (A), the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are superimposed on the first normal background image G111. Is being done. Here, when the stop display of the lost symbol A is performed in the 789th special figure variable display in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the effect symbol of the combination (display mode) showing a predetermined loss is shown. The stop display of EZ1 to EZ3 and the stop display of small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed.

Subsequently, when the next 790th time, in other words, the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling of 10 times is started, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started. And the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is started.

Further, when the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling is started, the effect of suggesting the number of remaining times of reaching the ceiling (the effect of suggesting the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling) is performed. The execution timing of the ceiling arrival remaining number suggestion effect can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, the ceiling arrival remaining number is 100 times, 50 times, 10 times, 5 times, 1 time, and 0 times (normal probability). It is set at the start of the variable display of the special figure (at the end of the state).

The specific content of the effect of suggesting the number of remaining ceiling arrivals can be appropriately set within a range in which the player can grasp the number of remaining ceiling arrivals, but in the first embodiment, the image G41 suggesting the number of remaining ceiling arrivals ( It is composed of the display of the effect effect image G41) suggesting the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling. In the first embodiment, the effect image G41 suggesting the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling is composed of the characters "○○ times to reach the ceiling". The number of remaining ceiling arrivals is displayed in this "○○" part.

The effect time of the effect suggesting the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, it is set to 2 seconds. Therefore, when 2 seconds have passed since the ceiling arrival remaining number suggestion effect was started, the ceiling arrival remaining number suggestion effect image G41 disappears as shown in FIG. 68 (D).

After that, the special figure variable display is repeatedly executed, and in the special figure variable display in which the number of remaining ceiling arrivals is one, the lost symbol A is stopped and displayed, and the next special figure variable display, that is, the normal probability state is executed. It is assumed that the last special figure 1 variable display (ceiling arrival fluctuation) in is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are started, and it is suggested that the number of remaining ceiling arrivals is 0. The effect of suggesting the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling is executed. It should be noted that the variation reaching the ceiling is the special figure 1 variable display, and the special figure variation pattern related to the special figure 1 variable display is usually a loss variation.

Then, when the effect of suggesting the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling is completed and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variablely displayed and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the special feature is displayed. FIG. 1 When the variable display is about to end, the entire display unit 50a is whitened out as shown in FIG. 70 (A) before a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds before) when the stop display of the lost symbol A is performed. The background image (in the first embodiment, the first normal background image G111) and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been displayed up to that point are hidden. Even when the entire display unit 50a is white out, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is visually executed.

The whiteout on the display unit 50a is eliminated immediately before the stop display of the lost symbol A is performed. When the whiteout is eliminated, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the ceiling background image G150 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and a combination showing a loss superimposed on the ceiling background image G150 ( The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode) appear. Then, according to the stop display of the lost symbol A, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination (display mode) indicating the loss are completely stopped and the effect is produced. The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the same combination (display mode) as the symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

Further, in response to the stop display of the lost symbol A due to the change in reaching the ceiling, an effect suggesting that the ceiling effect mode is set (ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect) is performed. The specific effect content of the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect can be appropriately set as long as the player can grasp that the ceiling effect mode is set, but in the first embodiment, the transition to the ceiling effect mode is performed. It is composed of a display of a suggestion image G42 (ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect image G42).

In the first embodiment, the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect image G42 is composed of the phrase "ceiling effect mode entry". The effect time of the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, it is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect, the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect image G42 disappears.

As described above, when the special symbol confirmation time elapses after the lost symbol A is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is set while the normal probability state is maintained by reaching the ceiling, and the normal game state is changed to the low probability high base game state. .. Then, when the variable display of the special figure is started in the high-probability high-base game state of reaching the ceiling, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is superimposed on the background image G150 for the ceiling. And the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is started. After that, in the high-probability high-base game state of reaching the ceiling, the effect of the ceiling effect mode, particularly the special figure variation effect, is executed.

In addition, when the special symbol confirmation time elapses after the stop display of the lost symbol A is performed due to the change in reaching the ceiling, the time is shortened after that, and it is advantageous for the player to play the game by hitting right. As shown in (D), the right-handed promotion image G30 is displayed.

In this way, when the special map stop display indicating a loss is performed in the special map variable display related to the specific number of times the ceiling is reached, the time saving state is set while the normal probability state is maintained, so that the normal gaming state is changed. Along with shifting to the low-probability high-base gaming state, the mode shifts from the normal effect mode to the ceiling effect mode.

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 70, the special figure variation pattern of the ceiling arrival variation is usually a loss variation, but in the case of a reach loss variation, the jackpot determination result is a loss, so there is no change in reaching the ceiling. However, the special figure variation effect is developed with the effect content indicated by the effect flow of the special figure variation effect related to the reach loss variation, and finally, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a predetermined combination (display mode) related to the reach loss variation The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect is performed to shift to the ceiling effect mode.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the ceiling arrival fluctuation is the SP loss fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), after the loss suggestion effect of the SP reach effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 71 (B). The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination (display mode) related to the reach loss appear, and the background image G115 for SP reach is switched to the background image G150 for the ceiling. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed are completely stopped as they are, and the small symbols KZ1 to the same combination (display mode) as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are used. KZ3 stops and displays. Further, at this time, the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect is executed superimposed on the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, as in the case of the normal loss fluctuation.

Further, when the special figure variation pattern of the ceiling arrival variation being executed in the specific example of FIG. 70 is a jackpot variation, the special map variation effect is performed according to the effect content indicated by the effect flow of the special map variation effect related to the jackpot variation. Finally, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination (display mode) related to the jackpot symbol. Here, as described above, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed due to the change in reaching the ceiling, the jackpot winning is prioritized. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot game is executed as it is without setting the time saving state triggered by the arrival at the ceiling according to the stop display of the jackpot symbol, and the high probability is high base according to the end of the jackpot game. Along with the gaming state or the low-probability high-base gaming state (time saving state), the probability variation effect mode or the time saving effect mode is set.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the ceiling arrival fluctuation is the SP jackpot fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), after the jackpot suggestion effect of the SP reach effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 72 (B). The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination (display mode) related to the jackpot symbol appear. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed are completely stopped as they are, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the jackpot game production is started according to the start of the jackpot game. Since the time saving state due to reaching the ceiling is not set, the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect is not executed when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped, and the process does not shift to the ceiling effect mode.

Next, using FIG. 73, the effect to be executed when the ceiling effect mode is changed to the special effect mode according to the normal game state when the end condition is satisfied in the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state. A specific example will be described.

Here, at present, in the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state, the special figure 2 variable display in which the loss symbol B is stopped and displayed due to the shortened loss fluctuation is executed, and in the ceiling effect mode, based on the special figure 2 variable display. It is assumed that the special figure fluctuation effect is being executed. Further, it is assumed that the special figure 2 variable display during execution is the 1000th special figure variable display constituting the end condition related to the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state. That is, it is assumed that when the currently executed special figure 2 variable display is completed, the end condition of the ceiling arrival low probability high base gaming state is satisfied and the normal gaming state is established.

As shown in FIG. 73 (A), the background image G150 for the ceiling is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are superimposed on the background image G150. It has been. Here, when the special figure 2 variable display is about to end, the display unit 50a is shown in FIG. 73 (B) before a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds before) when the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed. The background image (in FIG. 73 (A), the background image G150 for the ceiling) and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been entirely whitened out and displayed up to that point are hidden. Even when the entire display unit 50a is white out, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is visually executed.

The whiteout on the display unit 50a is eliminated immediately before the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed. When the whiteout is eliminated, the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and a temporary stop display is performed in a combination (display mode) that superimposes a loss on the special background image G140. The production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 appear. Then, according to the stop display of the lost symbol B, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination (display mode) indicating the loss are completely stopped and the effect is produced. The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the same combination as the symbols EZ1 to EZ3. When the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, the normal game state is immediately set, and in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game by left-handed, so that the right-handed promotion image G30 disappears.

In this way, when the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed due to the final change in the ceiling time and the normal gaming state is entered, the background image G150 for the ceiling to the background image G140 for special use are displayed when the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed. It shifts from the ceiling effect mode to the special effect mode by switching to. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), after the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed, the first special figure 2 in the normal gaming state and the special effect mode is performed. When the variable display is started, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are superimposed on the special background image G140 according to the start, and the special effect mode is started. The suggestion effect image G38 is displayed. After that, as described above, the time-saving revival challenge production by the special production mode is performed until the special figure 2 hold is exhausted. When the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed in the final variation of the ceiling time reduction, the result notification effect is not executed as in the case of the stop display of the lost symbol B in the final variation of the jackpot time reduction.

Next, using FIG. 74, the stop display of the loss symbol C is performed in the final variation of the ceiling time reduction, and the ceiling effect mode is changed to the time reduction effect mode according to the special loss low probability high base game state. An example of the effect on the display unit 50a will be described. As described above, basically, even if the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the low probability high base game state, the time saving state is not newly set, but it is related to the end condition of the low probability high base game state. When the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the final variable display of the special figure, the normal probability state is momentarily set, so a new time saving state is set, and the low probability high base game state is substantially set. Will continue.

Here, at present, in the final variation of the ceiling time reduction, the special figure 2 variable display in which the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the shortened loss variation is executed, and in the ceiling effect mode, the special figure variation effect is performed based on the special figure 2 variable display. Is in the running situation.

As shown in FIG. 74 (A), the background image G150 for the ceiling is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are superimposed on the background image G150. It has been. Here, when the special figure 2 variable display is about to end, a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds before) when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, as in the case where the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed. As shown in FIG. 74 (B), the entire display unit 50a is whitened out, and the background image (in FIG. 74 (A), the background image G150 for the ceiling) and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been displayed up to that point are displayed. It becomes hidden. Even when the entire display unit 50a is white out, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is visually executed.

The whiteout on the display unit 50a is eliminated immediately before the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed. When the whiteout is eliminated, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the time-saving background image G130 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the shortened loss fluctuation is superimposed on the time-saving background image G130. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed appear in the combination (display mode) associated with the lost symbol C. Then, according to the stop display of the lost symbol C, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed are completely stopped as they are, and unlike the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the special loss is achieved. Small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a special combination (display mode). Even if the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, the time saving state continues, so that the right-handed promotion image G30 is continuously displayed as it is.

In addition, according to the stop display of the lost symbol C, the effect suggesting that the low-probability high-base game state continues to be in the time-saving effect mode (time-saving effect mode transition suggestion effect) is the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. It is executed superimposed on. The specific production content of the time-saving effect mode transition suggestion effect can be appropriately set as long as the player can grasp that the low-probability high-base gaming state continues to be in the time-saving effect mode. The image G43 (the time-saving effect mode transition suggestion effect image G43) suggesting that the low-probability high-base gaming state continues to be in the time-saving effect mode is configured. In the first embodiment, the time saving effect mode transition suggestion effect image G43 is composed of the phrase "time saving effect mode entry".

In this way, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed due to the final fluctuation of the ceiling time reduction and a special loss occurs, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, the background image G150 for the ceiling is changed to the background image G130 for the time reduction. It shifts from the ceiling effect mode to the time saving effect mode by switching. As shown in FIG. 74 (D), when the special symbol variable display is started after the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed, the special symbol variable display is started in response to the start. Therefore, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are superimposed on the time-saving background image G130. After that, the effect is performed by the time saving effect mode in the special loss low probability high base game state. When the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the final variation of the ceiling time reduction, the result notification effect is not executed as in the case of the stop display of the lost symbol B in the final variation of the jackpot time reduction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the final change of the special loss, but a specific example of the effect executed when the time saving effect mode is changed to the ceiling effect mode by reaching the ceiling will be described. .. As described above, when the stop display of the loss symbol C is performed due to the final change of the special loss, the normal probability state is momentarily set, so that a new time saving state is set with the special loss as a trigger. However, if this special loss final change is the 800th time since the big hit low probability high base game state is set, in other words, if it also corresponds to the ceiling arrival change, the ceiling arrival is prioritized and it is newly added by reaching the ceiling instead of the special loss. The time saving state is set.

Here, as a special loss time reduction final variation, the special figure 2 variable display in which the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed due to the shortened loss variation is currently executed, and the special figure variation is based on the special figure 2 variable display in the time reduction effect mode. It is assumed that the production is being executed. Further, it is assumed that the special figure 2 variable display during execution is the 800th special figure variable display after the jackpot low probability high base game state before that, and corresponds to the ceiling arrival fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 75 (A), the time-saving background image G130 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are superimposed on the background image G130. It has been. Here, when the special figure 2 variable display is about to end, the display unit 50a is shown in FIG. 75 (B) before a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds before) when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed. The background image (in FIG. 75A, the background image G130 for shortening the time) and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been entirely whitened out and displayed up to that point are hidden. Even when the entire display unit 50a is white out, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is visually executed.

The whiteout on the display unit 50a is eliminated immediately before the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed. When the whiteout is eliminated, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the background image G150 for the ceiling is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the background image G150 for the ceiling is superimposed on the background image G150 for shortening. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed appear in the combination (display mode) associated with the lost symbol C. Then, according to the stop display of the lost symbol C, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were temporarily stopped and displayed are completely stopped as they are, and the lost symbol C due to the shortened loss fluctuation is displayed. The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the associated combination (display mode).

Further, in response to the special figure stop display being performed due to the change in reaching the ceiling, the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect is performed superimposed on the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Even if the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, the time saving state continues, so that the right-handed promotion image G30 is continuously displayed as it is.

In this way, the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed due to the final change in the special loss time reduction, but when the high-probability high-base gaming state is substantially continued by reaching the ceiling, the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed. At that time, the time-saving background image G130 is switched to the ceiling background image G150 to shift from the time-saving effect mode to the ceiling effect mode. As shown in FIG. 75 (D), when the special symbol variable display is started after the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed, it corresponds to the start. Then, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are superimposed on the background image G150 for the ceiling. After that, the ceiling effect mode is used to perform the effect in the high-probability high-base game state of reaching the ceiling. When the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the special loss time reduction final change, the result notification effect is not executed as in the case where the stop display of the loss symbol B is performed in the jackpot time reduction final change.

In addition, if the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed due to the final change in the jackpot time reduction, the high-probability high-base game state is substantially continued due to the special loss. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 including the symbol G37 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 was performed. However, if the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed due to the final change in the special loss time reduction, the low-probability high-base game state is continued as it is by reaching the ceiling instead of the special loss. The production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 including the loss-dedicated symbol G37 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are not stopped and displayed, and the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols are combined (display mode) to show the loss symbol C by the shortened loss fluctuation. The stop display of the symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed.

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 75, since the special figure 2 variable display being executed is the special figure 2 variable display in which the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed, the special figure fluctuation pattern is always shortened and lost, but the loss is lost. When the symbol B is a stop display of the special figure 2 variable display, the special figure variation pattern is a predetermined reach loss variation or a shortened loss variation. Then, in the case of a predetermined reach loss change, the ceiling is still reached after that, but the effect content (normal variation → reach → effect mode) indicated by the effect flow of the special figure variation effect related to the predetermined reach loss change is met. The special figure variation effect is developed in the reach effect), and finally, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination (display mode) related to the reach loss, and the ceiling effect mode is performed. A transition suggestion effect is performed and the mode shifts to the ceiling effect mode. On the other hand, even in the case of shortened loss fluctuation, the ceiling is still reached after that, but the special figure fluctuation effect is developed according to the effect content (normal variation) indicated by the effect flow of the special figure variation effect related to the shortened loss change. Finally, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination (display mode) related to the normal loss, and the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect is performed to produce the ceiling effect. Move to the mode. When the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed in the special loss time reduction final change, the result notification effect is not executed as in the case where the stop display of the loss symbol B is performed in the big hit time reduction final change.

Further, when the special figure 2 variable display being executed in the specific example of FIG. 75 is the special figure 2 variable display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the special figure variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display is a predetermined reach jackpot. Will be. In the case of a predetermined reach jackpot fluctuation, the special map variation effect is developed according to the effect content (normal variation → reach → reach effect according to the effect mode) indicated by the effect flow of the special figure variation effect related to the predetermined reach jackpot variation. Finally, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination (display mode) related to the jackpot symbol type. Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure variable display of a specific number of times related to reaching the ceiling, the jackpot winning is given priority. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot game is executed as it is without setting the time saving state triggered by the arrival at the ceiling according to the stop display of the jackpot symbol, and the high probability is high base according to the end of the jackpot game. Along with the gaming state or the low-probability high-base gaming state (time saving state), the probability variation effect mode or the time saving effect mode is set. It should be noted that the ceiling effect mode transition suggestion effect is not executed when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped, and the process does not shift to the ceiling effect mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, special figures other than the time-saving final fluctuations (big hit time-saving final fluctuations, special loss time-saving final fluctuations, ceiling time-saving final fluctuations) in the time-saving state, more specifically, the high-base game state with a high reduction rate. In the variable display, the lost symbol C that can trigger the occurrence of the time saving state is stopped and displayed, but if the time saving state is not reached, the lost symbol is displayed by the stop display of the sub symbols (effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3). Since it is suggested that C is stopped and displayed, but the time is not shortened, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to understand the playability and deteriorating the game interest. In addition, in the final fluctuation of the jackpot time reduction, the lost symbol C that may trigger the occurrence of the time reduction state is stopped and displayed, and when the time saving state is reached, the sub symbols (directed symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3) are stopped and displayed. Since it is suggested that the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed and the time is shortened, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to understand the game playability and deteriorating the game interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the trigger for the occurrence of the time saving state is the variable display of the special figure other than the time saving final fluctuation (big hit time saving final fluctuation, special loss time saving final fluctuation, ceiling time saving final fluctuation) in the high base game state. If the lost symbol B that cannot be lost is displayed as a stop and the time is not shortened, the sub symbols (directed symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3) are stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) different from that of the lost symbol C. By doing so, it is suggested that the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed and the time is not shortened, so that it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to understand the game playability and deteriorating the game interest.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 uses the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to suggest that the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed, but the time is not shortened (6 ・ 1 ・ 3), and the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed to shorten the time. It suggests that it will be in a state (6, exclusive, 3), and that the lost symbol B will be stopped and displayed, and that it will not be in a shortened working hours state (such as "6, 3.1"). On the other hand, when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 stops and displays the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a predetermined combination (6, 3.1), and the jackpot game is not executed and the time is shortened. It may be suggested that the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed, but if the jackpot game is not executed and the time is not shortened, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed even when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed. It is suggested that the jackpot game is not executed and the time is not shortened by displaying the stop with a possible predetermined combination (6, 3.1). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to understand the playability and deteriorating the game interest.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the end condition related to the jackpot low probability high base gaming state is satisfied and the special figure variable display can be executed in the normal gaming state, the result notification effect is executed. , If the end condition related to the big hit low probability high base game state is satisfied, but the special figure variable display can be executed in the low probability high base game state due to special loss or reaching the ceiling, the result notification effect is executed. do not do. Therefore, in a sense, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the result notification effect, which is a delimiter for the end of the big hit low probability high base game state. Further, since the transition from the jackpot low probability high base gaming state to the normal gaming state becomes easy to understand, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to understand the gameplay and deteriorating the game interest. Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the end condition related to the ceiling reaching low probability high base gaming state or the special loss low probability high base gaming state is satisfied, and the special figure variable display can be executed in the normal gaming state. Even if it is, the result notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the big hit low probability high base game state, the feeling that the player has drawn by himself is emphasized, and the whole game can be sharpened.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, there is a higher possibility that the big hit time reduction final fluctuation will result in a special loss in the normal game state immediately after the time reduction, rather than the special loss time reduction final fluctuation and the ceiling time reduction time reduction final fluctuation. , Even in the same low-probability high-base gaming state, there is a possibility that the loss symbol C will be stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state that shifts immediately after that, and the low-probability high-base gaming state will be reached (returning the time reduction). Because they are different, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and improve the game's interest.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. It is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

The number of executions (time reduction specified number of times) of the special figure variable display constituting the establishment of the end condition relating to the low-probability high-base gaming state based on various occurrence triggers is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. Furthermore, the establishment of the end condition related to the low-probability high-base game state based on various occurrence triggers is other than the number of executions of the special figure variable display such as the elapsed time, the number of times the game ball is fired, and the number of times a specific effect such as reach appears. It may be set based on the matter.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of executions of the special figure variable display constituting the establishment of the end condition related to the low-probability high-base game state based on various occurrence triggers is as follows: ceiling-reaching low-probability high-base game state> special loss low probability. It is set in the order of high base game state> big hit low probability high base game state, but this magnitude relationship (relationship of advantages and disadvantages for the player) may be changed as appropriate. Further, a part or all of the number of executions (time reduction specified number of times) of the special figure variable display constituting the establishment of the end condition related to the low-probability high-base gaming state based on various occurrence triggers may be the same.

Further, in the first embodiment, one type of time saving specified number of times related to the low-probability high-base gaming state based on various occurrence triggers is set, but a plurality of types may be provided depending on the occurrence triggers. For example, for the jackpot low-probability high-base gaming state, a plurality of types of jackpot symbols that become the low-probability high-base gaming state after the jackpot game are provided, and the specified number of time reductions related to the low-probability high-base gaming state differs depending on the jackpot symbol type. You may do so. In addition, for the special loss low-probability high-base game state, multiple types of loss symbols that can trigger the occurrence of the low-probability high-base game state are provided, and the specified number of time reductions related to the low-probability high-base game state is provided according to the loss symbol type. May be different. Further, regarding the low-probability high-base game state reaching the ceiling, when the ceiling is reached, the specified number of time reductions related to the low-probability high-base game state may be determined to be one from a plurality of times by a predetermined determination or the like. .. Alternatively, when the normal probability state is newly set, the specific number of times to reach the ceiling may be determined to be one from a plurality of times, and the specified number of time reductions may be provided according to the specific number of times. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the specific number of times for reaching the ceiling is set to 800 times, but this number of times is not limited to the first embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the specific number of times is not the number of times the special figure variable display is executed without winning the jackpot after the normal probability state is set, but the special figure variable display is executed without winning the jackpot after the non-time saving state is set. It may be the number of times it has been done. Alternatively, as a condition for reaching the ceiling, it may be set based on items other than the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, such as the elapsed time, the number of times the game ball is fired, and the number of times a specific effect such as reach appears.

Further, in the first embodiment, only one type of specific number of times for reaching the ceiling is set, but a plurality of types may be set. For example, when the normal probability state is newly set, the specific number of times for reaching the ceiling may be determined to be one from a plurality of.

Further, in the first embodiment, regardless of the occurrence trigger of the time saving state, the element constituting the opening ease of the second starting port 12 related to the time saving state (time saving state component), specifically, the winning probability. , The normal figure fluctuation time, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in one auxiliary game are all the same, but some or all of them may be different depending on the occurrence trigger. In other words, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 related to the reduced working hours state may be different depending on the trigger of the occurrence of the reduced working hours state. In this case, the magnitude relationship (relationship of advantages and disadvantages for the player) of the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 related to the time saving state may be established among all the occurrence triggers, and some occurrence triggers may be established. A magnitude relationship may be established between the two.

Further, in the first embodiment, the same effect mode (time saving effect mode) is executed in the jackpot low probability high base game state and the special loss low probability high base game state, and in the ceiling reach low probability high base game state. Is executed in different production modes (ceiling production mode), but even if the production in the same production mode is executed in all low-probability high-base game states, the production in different production modes is executed. You may do so. Alternatively, in the jackpot low-probability high-base game state and the ceiling-reaching low-probability high-base game state, the same effect mode is executed, and in the special loss low-probability high-base game state, a different effect mode is executed. You can do it. In addition, in the low-probability high-base game state of reaching the ceiling and the special loss low-probability high-base game state, the same effect mode is executed, and in the big hit low-probability high-base game state, a different effect mode is executed. You can do it.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot low probability high base game state, the time saving remaining number image G31 is displayed so that the time saving remaining number of times can be easily recognized, while the ceiling arrival low probability is high. In the base game state and the special loss low probability high base game state, the time saving remaining number image G31 is not displayed, and the time saving remaining number of times is not easily recognizable. However, in both the low-probability high-base gaming state of reaching the ceiling and / or one of the special low-probability high-base gaming states, the same image or a different image as the time-saving remaining number image G31 is displayed. It may be configured so that the number of remaining time reductions in the high-probability-based gaming state can be easily grasped.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot low probability high base game state ends and the normal game state is reached, the result notification effect is executed, and in the result notification effect, this is from the time when the normal game state was before this. Immediately after, the total number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game until the normal game state is reached and the number of winnings of the jackpot are notified, but the content notified in the result notification effect may be changed as appropriate. .. For example, the content notified by the result notification effect may be only one of the total number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game and the number of winnings of the jackpot.

Further, in the first embodiment, the result is notified when the ceiling reaching low probability high base gaming state ends and the normal gaming state ends, and when the special loss low probability high base gaming state ends and the normal gaming state ends. Although the effect is not executed, the result notification effect may be executed in either case or in either case. In this case, the content notified by the result notification effect related to the jackpot low probability high base game state and the content notified by the result notification effect related to the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state and the special loss low probability high base game state. May be the same or different. Alternatively, when the special loss due to the special loss in the jackpot time reduction final fluctuation ends and the normal gaming state is reached, and when the ceiling is reached in the jackpot time reduction final fluctuation, the ceiling arrival low probability high base gaming state is When it ends and enters the normal game state, the result notification effect is executed, and when the other special loss low probability high base game state ends and it becomes the normal game state, and when it reaches the ceiling, the low probability high base game When the state ends and the normal game state is reached, the result notification effect may not be executed.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the low-probability high-base gaming state (time-saving state), the lost symbol C that can trigger the occurrence of the time-saving state is stopped and displayed, but the low-probability high-base gaming state (time-saving state) is newly displayed. If this is not the case, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a different combination (display mode) from the stop display of the lost symbol B, which cannot trigger the occurrence of the time saving state, so that the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed, but the time is shortened. It is suggested that this is not the case, but the combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 (display mode) in this case is different from the combination (display mode) that can appear in the case of the stop display of the lost symbol B. It may be changed as appropriate. Alternatively, in the first embodiment, the combination of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 that are stopped and displayed in this case is small when the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed and a new low-probability high-based gaming state (time saving state) is reached. Although it is different from the combination (display mode) of the symbols KZ1 to KZ3, they may be the same. Furthermore, the combination (display mode) of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 that have been stopped and displayed in this case is displayed, and the small symbol KZ1 when the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed and a new low-probability high-base gaming state (time saving state) is entered. Depending on the combination (display mode) of KZ3, the lost symbol C may include a dedicated symbol.

In addition, in the low-probability high-base gaming state (time-saving state), the lost symbol C, which may trigger the occurrence of the time-saving state, is stopped and displayed, but if the low-probability high-base gaming state (time-saving state) is not newly entered, the time-saving state is reached. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) that can appear when the stop display of the lost symbol B that cannot trigger the occurrence of is performed, but the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. The stop display may be performed in the same combination (display mode) as above. In this case, all the symbols used in the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be composed of symbols that may appear when the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, or a part thereof. Alternatively, all of them may be composed of a dedicated symbol that cannot appear when the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed.

In addition, in the low-probability high-base gaming state (time-saving state), if the lost symbol C that can trigger the occurrence of the time-saving state is stopped and displayed, and a new low-probability high-based gaming state (time-saving state) is entered, the lost symbol C By displaying the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 using the dedicated symbol (special loss dedicated symbol G37), the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed, and a new low-probability high-base game is performed. Although it is suggested that the state (time saving state) is entered, the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed, but the loss symbol B is stopped and displayed as in the case where the low probability high base game state (time saving state) is not newly entered. Although it is a combination (display mode) that cannot appear when the above is performed, it is also possible to configure all the symbols that can appear and display them in a stopped manner. Further, in this case, the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed, but the combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (display mode) and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 when the low probability high base game state (time saving state) is not newly entered. The stop display may be made according to the combination (display mode) of.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the loss symbol C derivation time saving state execution effect, the special loss dedicated symbol G37 is displayed as the medium effect symbol EZ2 and the small and medium size symbol KZ2, but the left effect symbol EZ1 and the left small symbol are displayed. It may be displayed as KZ1, the right effect symbol EZ3, and the right small symbol KZ3. Alternatively, in the time saving state execution effect for deriving the lost symbol C, all of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and all or one of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are dedicated to the time saving state when the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed. It may be composed of a symbol.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lost symbol C derivation time saving state execution effect, the lost symbol C derivation time saving state non-execution effect, and the lost symbol derivation effect are composed of the small symbol KZ, but the effect symbol EZ and the sub It may be composed of a specific image different from the design SZ. Alternatively, the loss symbol C derivation time saving state non-execution effect and the loss symbol derivation effect may be executed using an effect device different from the image display device 50 such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the board movable device 56. good.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the special loss time reduction final change corresponds to the ceiling arrival change and the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed, the ceiling arrival is prioritized and the ceiling arrival low probability high base game state is established. , Special loss may be prioritized and the special loss low probability high base game state may be set. Further, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot symbol B or the jackpot symbol E is stopped and displayed when the special loss time reduction final fluctuation corresponds to the ceiling arrival fluctuation, the jackpot winning is prioritized and is low through the jackpot game. Although it will be in a high-probability base game state, it may be possible to give priority to reaching the ceiling and to be in a low-probability high-base game state.

Further, in the first embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation time when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed in the time saving final fluctuation and becomes the normal gaming state is the case of the jackpot low probability high base gaming state and the ceiling arrival low probability high. It is determined by different conditions (special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table) in the case of the base game state and the case of the special loss low probability high base game state, and it is set so that the former case is likely to be longer, but the latter case. The case may be set so that it tends to be longer.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed due to the final time reduction and the normal gaming state is reached, the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display performed in the normal gaming state, and the probability is low. The probability of becoming a high-base game state is higher in the high-base game state with a low probability of reaching the ceiling, and in the high-base game state with a low probability of a big hit than in the case of a high-base game state with a special loss. The ceiling arrival low probability high base game state and the special loss low probability high base game state may be higher than in the high base game state. In addition, as the order of this possibility, the jackpot low probability high base game state = special loss low probability high base game state <ceiling arrival low probability high base game state, special loss low probability high base game state> ceiling It may be changed as appropriate, such as setting the achievement low probability high base game state> the jackpot low probability high base game state.

Further, when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed in the normal game state due to the final change in the time reduction, the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display performed in the normal game state, and the low probability high base game state is entered. In addition to the special figure fluctuation time of the last special figure variable display, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of entering the normal game state due to the possibility is, for example, the time reduction final change is executed for a specific occurrence trigger. The upper limit of the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 can be increased or decreased while the game is being played, and as a result, the magnitude relationship (the relationship of advantage or disadvantage for the player) of the possibility of becoming a low-probability high-based gaming state is established. May be.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the stop display of the loss symbol C is performed due to the ceiling time reduction final variation and the special loss time reduction final variation, the special figure variable other than the jackpot time reduction final variation in the jackpot low probability high base gaming state is performed. Similar to the case where the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed in the display, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a combination (display mode) that can appear even when the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, and the lost symbol is displayed. It is a combination that cannot appear when the stop display of B is performed, but it is a combination dedicated to the loss symbol C by a normal number that is also used when the stop display of all the lost symbols B is performed (display mode). The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. However, for both or one of the ceiling time reduction final fluctuation and the special loss time reduction final fluctuation, the combination including the special loss dedicated symbol G37 is the same as the case where the loss symbol C is stopped and displayed in the jackpot time reduction final fluctuation. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be stopped and displayed.

7. Other Modification Examples Next, other modification examples of the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the first embodiment will be described below. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment and the first embodiment will be referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY or the like".

In pachinko gaming machines such as PY, variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed using the display unit 50a in order to notify the special figure lottery result, but instead of the image display device, a so-called "rotating drum type gaming machine" (Slot machine) ”may be arranged, and the special figure lottery result may be notified by variably displaying the drum on which the symbol is displayed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big hit game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big hit game may be provided in addition to the big winning opening 14.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, when it is determined to be a specific jackpot symbol type, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting condition of the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big prize device 14D, a second big prize device that can be opened and closed and allows a game ball to enter at the time of opening is provided at a position where the game ball in the game area 6 can reach, and a big hit game is in progress. When the game ball that has entered the second big prize device after the second big prize device is opened in a predetermined round game passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state is reached with the end of the big hit game. May be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big prize device opens for a time (for example, 29.5 seconds) that makes it easy to enter the ball, and a second big prize device wins the ball. A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the game ball won in the second big prize device can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game ball to the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Then, although the opening time of the second prize-winning device is the same, the jackpot symbol and the high-probability state that make it easy to set the high-probability state can be obtained by combining the opening mode of the second prize-winning device and the operating mode of the distribution device. It is also possible to provide a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the effect control board performs basic control related to the progress of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game). Although the control of the game and the control of the effect are performed on different boards as in the case of 120, it may be configured to perform the control on one board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention can be applied to other ball gaming machines such as an arrange ball machine and a sparrow ball gaming machine, a rotating body type gaming machine (so-called "slot machine"), and the like.

8. Inventions disclosed in the above-described embodiments The following inventions A to B are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [mode for carrying out the invention]. In the description of the inventions A to D, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiment of the above-mentioned invention and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a general term for the following inventions A1 to A6, invention B is a general term for the following inventions B1 to B3, invention C is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C5, and invention D is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C5. , Is a general term for the following inventions D1 to D6.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1 is
A game control means (game control) that executes a jackpot game when the first specific result is derived (the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) by variable display of identification information (special symbol) for notifying a predetermined determination result (big hit determination result, etc.). Microcomputer 101) and
A production control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect by using a predetermined effect means including a display unit (image display device 50) is provided.
After the jackpot game, the game control means has a specific state (time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal non-specific state (non-time saving state) regarding predetermined matters related to the game (easiness of opening the second starting port 12). ) In a gaming machine that may be
When the second specific result different from the first specific result is derived (the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed) by the variable display of the identification information, the game control means does not execute the jackpot game and the specific state. There are times when the game is set to, and times when the game is not executed and the specific state is not set.
In the effect control means, the second specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information, but when the jackpot game is not executed and the specific state is not reached, the second specific result is derived. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second specific result derivation specific state non-execution effect (an effect in which small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a combination dedicated to the lost symbol C) that suggests that a specific state is not reached.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to the invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A1.
When the second specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information and the jackpot game is not executed and the specific state is reached, the effect control means derives the second specific result and the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second specific result derivation specific state execution effect (an effect in which small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a combination including a special loss-dedicated symbol G37).

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to the invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A2.
The effect control means can display a specific image (small symbols KZ1 to KZ3) on the display means.
The display mode of the specific image includes a first display mode (a combination dedicated to the loss symbol C) and a second display mode (a combination including the special loss symbol G37).
The second specific result derivation specific state non-execution effect is composed of the display of the specific image of the first display mode, and the second specific result derivation specific state execution effect is the display of the specific image of the second display mode. A gaming machine characterized by being composed of displays.

8-1--4. Invention A4
The gaming machine according to the invention A4 is
The gaming machine according to the invention A3.
The game control means performs the jackpot game when the first specific result and the third specific result different from the second specific result are derived (the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed) by the variable display of the identification information. Without doing it or putting it in the specific state
When the third specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information, the effect control means has a third specific result derivation effect (loss symbol A and loss) suggesting that the third specific result has been derived. It is possible to execute the effect that the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed by the combination associated with the symbol B).
The display mode of the specific image also includes the first display mode and a third display mode different from the second display mode (a combination associated with the lost symbol A and the lost symbol B).
The gaming machine characterized in that the third specific result derivation effect is composed of the display of the specific image in the third display mode.

8-1-5. Invention A5
The gaming machine according to the invention A5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of the inventions A1 to A4.
The effect control means can execute variable display of a symbol (small symbol) in the table means according to the variable display of the identification information.
The specific image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is composed of the design.

8-1-6. Invention A6
The gaming machine according to the invention A6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of the inventions A1 to A5.
When the second specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information, the game control means sets the game state to the specific state without executing the jackpot game if the game state at that time is the non-specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the gaming state at that time is the specific state, the jackpot game is not executed and the specific state is not set.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to the invention B1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game when a specific result is derived (a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) by variable display of identification information (special symbol) for notifying a predetermined determination result.
It is provided with an effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect using a predetermined effect means (image display device 50 or the like).
The game control means is used in a gaming machine in which, after the jackpot game, a predetermined state related to a game may be brought into a specific state (time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than a non-specific state (non-time saving state).
The game control means is
When the specific state is set after the big hit game, the identification information is displayed in the non-specific state according to the fulfillment of the end condition related to the specific state (execution of the special figure variable display a specified number of times for the big hit time reduction). May make variable display feasible,
Although the end condition is satisfied, the specific condition different from the derivation of the specific result is satisfied (special loss, reaching the ceiling), and the specific condition is specified without variable display of the identification information in the non-specific state. The variable display of the identification information can be executed in the state,
The effect control means is
When the variable display of the identification information can be executed in the non-specific state in response to the satisfaction of the end condition, a result notification effect (result notification display) for notifying a predetermined result is executed.
Although the end condition related to the specific state is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is executed in the specific state without causing the variable display of the identification information in the non-specific state according to the satisfaction of the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the result notification effect is not executed when it is possible.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to the invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1.
The game control means is a variable display of the identification information, and when a predetermined result different from the specific result is derived (the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed), the identification information is variablely displayed without executing the jackpot game. After that, the variable display of the identification information can be executed in the specific state,
The specific condition is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined result is derived by variable display of the identification information.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to the invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2.
The game control means enables variable display of the identification information in the specific state in response to the satisfaction of the specific condition, and as a result of executing variable display of the identification information in the specific state, the specific state. The end condition (the special figure variable display is executed the special loss time reduction specified number of times, the special figure variable display is executed the ceiling time reduction specified number of times) is satisfied, and the non-specification is performed according to the establishment of the end condition. In the state, the variable display of the identification information may be enabled.
As a result of the variable display of the identification information being executed in the specific state related to the establishment of the specific condition, the effect control means satisfies the end condition related to the specific state, and the end condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the end condition. A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display of the identification information is made executable in a non-specific state, the result notification effect is not executed.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to the invention C1 is
It is equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game in response to a specific result being derived (a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) by variable display of identification information (special symbol).
The game control means may bring a predetermined state related to the game into a specific state (time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal non-specific state (non-time saving state) according to the end of the jackpot game. It ’s a machine,
The game control means is
It is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of the identification information.
By satisfying a predetermined condition (reaching the ceiling, special loss) different from the derivation of the specific result, the specific state may be achieved without executing the jackpot game.
In the specific state corresponding to the end of the jackpot game, the non-specific state may be set when a predetermined end condition (the special figure variable display is executed a specified number of times for the jackpot time reduction) is satisfied.
A predetermined end condition (a special figure variable display is executed a specified number of times for a ceiling time reduction, and a special figure variable display is executed a special loss time reduction specified number of times) is satisfied in the specific state according to the establishment of the predetermined condition. May cause the non-specific state
In the case of the specific state corresponding to the end of the jackpot game and the case of the specific state corresponding to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, the variable display of the identification information reserved when the non-specific state is reached is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined result that is executed and different from the specific result is derived, and the possibility that the jackpot game is not executed and the specific state is reached is different.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to the invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined condition includes the fact that the predetermined result is derived by variable display of the identification information.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to the invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined condition does not include the fact that the predetermined result is derived by the variable display of the identification information.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to the invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions C1 to C3.
A starting area (second starting port 12) through which the game ball can enter is provided in the game area where the launched game ball can flow down.
The starting area is configured to be openable and closable.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined item relating to the game is the ease of opening the starting region.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to the invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions C1 to C4.
In the case of the specific state corresponding to the end of the jackpot game and the case of the specific state corresponding to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, the variable display of the identification information held when the normal game state is reached is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by different expectations for the number of machines.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to the invention D1 is
It is equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game in response to a specific result being derived (a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) by variable display of identification information (special symbol).
The game control means is a gaming machine that may be set to a specific gaming state (low probability and high base gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state in response to the end of the jackpot game.
The game control means can be brought into the specific game state without executing the jackpot game, depending on the satisfaction of the specific condition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific conditions include a first specific condition and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to the invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1.
When both the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, the game control means gives priority to the establishment of the first specific condition and sets the specific game state according to the establishment of the first specific condition. A gaming machine characterized by being.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to the invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention D1 or the invention D2.
The first specific condition includes that the variable display of the identification information is executed a specific number of times (800 times) in the normal gaming state without deriving the specific result.
The second specific condition includes a variable display of the identification information, in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is derived (the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed).

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to the invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to invention D3.
When the specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information related to the establishment of the first specific condition, the game control means gives priority to the derivation of the specific result, executes the jackpot game, and executes the jackpot game. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific gaming state is set according to the end of the gaming.

8-4-5. Invention D5
The gaming machine according to the invention D5 is
A gaming machine according to the invention D1 or the invention D2.
The first specific condition includes that a predetermined result different from the specific result is derived (the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed) by the variable display of the identification information.
The second specific condition includes a game machine in which the variable display of the identification information is executed a specific number of times (800 times) without deriving the specific result in the normal gaming state.

8-4-6. Invention D6
The gaming machine according to the invention D6 is
A gaming machine according to invention D5.
When the specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information related to the establishment of the second specific condition, the game control means gives priority to the derivation of the specific result, executes the jackpot game, and executes the jackpot game. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific gaming state is set according to the end of the gaming.

PY, PY1 ... Pachinko game machine 1 ... Game board 6 ... Game area 6A ... Left game area 6B ... Right game area 11 ... 1st start port 11a ... 1st start port sensor 12 ... 2nd start port 12a ... 2nd start port Sensor 14 ... Large winning opening 14a ... Large winning opening sensor 50 ... Image display device 50a ... Display unit 52 ... Speaker 53 ... Frame lamp 100 ... Game control board 101 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control board 121 ... Production control microcomputer 140 ... Image control board

Claims (6)

A game control means for executing a jackpot game when the first specific result is derived by variable display of identification information for notifying a predetermined determination result, and
It is provided with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect by using a predetermined effect means including a display means.
The game control means is used in a gaming machine in which, after the jackpot game, a predetermined state related to a game may be brought into a specific state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal non-specific state.
The game control means is a variable display of the identification information, and when a second specific result different from the first specific result is derived, the game is brought into the specific state without executing the big hit game, and the big hit game. There are times when the specific state is not reached without executing
The effect control means is
When the second specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information, but the jackpot game is not executed and the specific state is not reached, the second specific result is derived but the specific state is not reached. Suggested second specific result derivation A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific state non-execution effect. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
When the second specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information and the jackpot game is not executed and the specific state is reached, the effect control means derives the second specific result and the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second specific result derivation specific state execution effect suggesting that the above is achieved. The gaming machine according to claim 2.
The effect control means can display a specific image on the display means.
The display mode of the specific image includes a first display mode and a second display mode.
The second specific result derivation specific state non-execution effect is composed of the display of the specific image of the first display mode, and the second specific result derivation specific state execution effect is the display of the specific image of the second display mode. A gaming machine characterized by being composed of displays. The gaming machine according to claim 3.
The game control means can also execute the jackpot game when the first specific result and the third specific result different from the second specific result are derived by the variable display of the identification information. Without
When the third specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information, the effect control means can execute the third specific result derivation effect suggesting that the third specific result is derived.
The display mode of the specific image also includes a first display mode and a third display mode different from the second display mode.
The gaming machine characterized in that the third specific result derivation effect is composed of the display of the specific image in the third display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The effect control means can execute variable display of a symbol in the table means according to the variable display of the identification information.
The specific image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is composed of the design. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
When the second specific result is derived by the variable display of the identification information, the game control means sets the game state to the specific state without executing the jackpot game if the game state at that time is the non-specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the gaming state at that time is the specific state, the jackpot game is not executed and the specific state is not set.

Images